Home

KYOCERA ECOSYS M2535dn

1. 1 Function Menu bmg OK Paper Selection O Collate O Duplex O Exit 2 3 Zoom gt fo 1003 Auto Standard Zoom 4 Standard Zoom Kad OK 129 STMT gt gt LTR 05 1003 78 LGL gt gt LTR zoom Entry ary OK 25 400 1008 5 6 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Zoom Press the OK key Zoom appears Press the A or V key to select the desired magnification To copy in the same size as the original select 100 To select automatic zoom select Auto To use fixed magnifications select Standard Zoom and press the OK key Standard Zoom appears Press the A or V key to select the desired magnification If you select Other and press the OK key you can select from additional magnifications To enter a magnification select Zoom Entry and press the OK key Zoom Entry appears Use the numeric keys to enter the any magnification Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins Basic Operation Duplex Copying Produce two sided copies The following duplex options are available You can also create single sided copies from two sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books The following modes are available One sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from one sided originals In case of an odd number of o
2. 1 2 Account List gt m eUI R amp D DEP SeRD Center Menu 3 Detail lt amp Print Restrict 4 7 Total ane Edit Detail lt OK Print Restrict 4 7 Copier Off Edit 4 Print Restrict m Counter Limit Reject Usage Limit Pages 0 1 9999999 123456 ages Restriction is applied Follow steps 1 to 9 of Managing Accounts on page 11 19 In Account List press the A or V key to select the account to which you want to set restriction of use and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to select the item to be restricted and then press Edit the Right Select key When selecting Split in Copy Print Count screen changes as shown in the left Press the A or V key to select the desired restriction method and then press the OK key If you select Counter Limit enter the upper limit number of pages in the next screen and then press the OK key 11 26 Management 5 Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary 6 Press the OK key again A confirmation screen appears Overwrite Are you sure ecUI DESIGN Yes No 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The restriction of use is changed Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Account List Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction The table below des
3. WSD PRINT gt 0m Off In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select WSD PRINT Press the OK key The WSD PRINT menu appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu 8 150 Default Setting System Menu Protocol Detail Make other network related settings NetBEUI Description Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI Default Setting Restarting the System SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3 FTP Server Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP FTP Client Select whether or not to send documents using FTP and the number of the port to be used Select whether or not to send documents using SMB On Port number 21 SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP SMTP E mail TX Select whether or not to send e mail using SMTP POP3 E mail RX Select whether or not to receive e mail using POP3 RAW Port Select whe
4. Exit gt OK Adj nsity nsity Print Density om Press the OK key Backgrnd Density appears Press the A or V key to select Copy Auto or Send Box Auto Press the OK key This displays the density selection screen for the mode selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Copy Auto is selected Press the A or V key to select the density from 3 Lighter to 3 Darker Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Backgrnd Density menu In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Adjust Maint Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Press the A or V key to select Print Density Press the OK key Print Density appears 8 118 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the A or V key to select the density from 1 Lighter to 5 Darker 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust Maint menu Correct Bk Line Correct fine black lines black streaks caused by contamination which may appear on the copies when the document processor used Paper feed direction lt The table below shows the available settings Item Description No correction performed Correction performed The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off Correction performed Select this item if black streak remains after using On Low Th
5. Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login Timer Setting lt m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit 1 Press the OK key Low Power Timer appears Press the A or V key to set the Low Power Timer Set the amount of time before entering the Low Power state in minutes You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears 8 36 Default Setting System Menu Sleep Rules oK Network Card Reader FAX Exit Network Sma OK OFF On Sleep Level models except for Europe 5 Press the A or V key to select Sleep Rules 6 Press the OK key Sleep Rules appears 7 Press A or V key to select the condition to be set 8 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Sleep Rules men
6. 7 Select Allow the connection and click Next 8 Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click Next 9 Enter Scan to SMB in Name and click Finish 2 44 Preparation before Use NOTE In Windows XP or Windows Vista follow the procedure below to set the port In Windows Vista from Start button on the Windows select Control Panel Security and then Turn Windows Firewall on or off If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 1 In Windows XP from Start button on the Windows select Control Panel and then Windows Firewall 2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port button 3 Specify Add a Port settings Enter any name in Name example Scan to SMB This will be the name of the new port Enter 445 in Port Number Select TCP for Protocol 4 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen In Windows 8 follow the procedure below to set the port 1 In charms on Desktop click Settings Control Panel System and Security and then Windows Firewall If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button 2 Configure the settings refer to Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 on page 2 42 2 45 Preparation before Use Loading Paper Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray A paper feeder is also available as an option refer to Overview of Optional Equipment on Appendix 2 Bef
7. Supported types Envelopes Supported paper sizes ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm No of sheets Transparency OHP film Letter A4 Appenadix 10 Basic Paper Specifications This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular dry copiers and page printers such as laser printers It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix Be careful when choosing paper Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine Refer to the subsequent sections for further details Criteria Specifications Weight Cassettes 60 to 120 g m Multi purpose tray 60 to 220 g m Thickness 0 086 to 0 110 mm Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 Moisture content 9 Grain direction Long grain paper supply direction Pulp content 80 or more NOTE Some recycled pap
8. Troubleshooting Responding to the flashing Attention LED If the Attention LED flashes press Status Job Cancel to check an error message If the message is not indicated on the Message Display when Status Job Cancel is pressed or the Attention LED flashes for 1 5 seconds check the following Symptom Cannot send fax Checkpoints Is the modular cord connected correctly Corrective Actions Connect the modular cord correctly Reference Page Is Permitted FAX No or Permitted ID No registered correctly Check Permitted FAX No and Permitted ID No FAX Operation Guide Chapter 6 Registering Permit FAX No and Registering Permit ID No Has a communication error occurred Check error codes in the TX RX Result Report and Activity Report If the error code starts with U or E perform the corresponding procedure FAX Operation Guide Appendix Error Code List Is the destination FAX line busy Send again Does the destination FAX machine respond Send again Is there an error other than above Contact your Service Representative 10 12 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop Leave the power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below Jam Location Indicators If a paper jam occurs the error me
9. 11 16 Management Login Logout If job accounting is enabled an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine Use the procedure below to login and logout Login NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Account ID ok Counter Logout Logout 1 Inthe screen below enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press the OK key NOTE If you entered a wrong character press the Clear key and enter the account ID again If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID a warning beep will sound and login will fail Enter the correct account ID By pressing Counter the Left Select key you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled the screen to enter the login user name and password appears Enter a login user name and password to log in Refer to Login Logout on page 11 5 If the user has already registered the account information the account ID entry would be skipped Refer to Adding a User on page 11 6 2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps When the operations are complete press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen 11 17 Management AccountingAccess System Menu Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m
10. Select Key Set m Print Store Exit Print O lol Left Right Exit Left Sma OK Paper Selection 4 Duplex EcoPrint This already registered function is 10 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Document Box Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Press the A or V key to select Print or Store Press the OK key This displays the flexible key selection screen for the function selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Print is selected Press the A or V key to select Left or Right Press the OK key This displays the function selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 7 The screen shown is the one when Left is selected Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Document Box menu IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered is displayed 8 110 Default Setting System Menu Printing Reports Sending Notice Print reports to check the machine settings and status Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured
11. 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Total Accounting 7 Press the OK key The Total Accounting menu appears 8 Press the A or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts and then press the OK key If you select Printed Pages or Scanned Pages press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items 9 After confirming the content press the OK key The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu 10 To reset the counter press the A or V key to select Counter Reset 11 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears 12 Press Yes the Left Select key The counter is reset Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Total Accounting menu 11 33 Management Each Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter 1 System Menu Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 4 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right
12. Login J qe 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt Optional Network NW InterfaceSend Exit Press the A or V key to select Restart Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Restart Are you sure Yes I No 5 Press Yes the Left Select key The printer is restarted If you press No the Right Select key the printer does not restart and the screen returns to the System menu 8 135 Default Setting System Menu Network Setup The following network settings are available LAN Interface Setup 8 136 TCP IP IPv4 Setup 8 137 TCP IP IPv6 Setup 8 146 Protocol Detail 8 151 LAN Interface Setup Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below to select the interface Sys Menu Count Report Counter System Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt WSD SCAN WSD PRINT 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appea
13. NOTE The maximum number of the storable files is 1 000 Storing Documents The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot 2 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Document Box Kad OK Sub Address Box Polling Box USB Memor 4 Press the OK key USB Memory appears USB Memory Sma OK Store File Folder 1 PAFile 1 o Menu Select 5 Select the destination of the scanned image files To save the data directly to the USB memory go to step 6 To save the data in the folder of USB memory press the A or V key to select the folder and then press the OK key The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels including the root folder 6 Press the A or V key to select Store File and then Ready to scan press the OK key The basic screen appears Press the Function Menu key to change the original type file A44 format etc as necessary For changing scan settings 1 Sided 300x300dpi refer to Sending Functions on page 5 1 Duplex ScanRes 6 5 Document Box 7 Press the Start key The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory IMPORTANT When removing the USB memory ensure that you use the correct removal procedure as described in Removing USB Memory
14. 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Printer Common Settings Copy Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer O EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select LF Action 4 Press the OK key LF Action appears LF Action gt LF and CR Ignore LF 5 Press the A or V key to select LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF CR Action 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code character code ODH The table below shows the available settings The default setting is CR Only Item Description CR Only Only character return performed LF and CR Character return and line feed performed Ignore CR Use the procedure below to specify a CR action Sys Menu Count Common Settings Copy Exit 1 No character return performed In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Printer 8 93 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select CR Action 4 Press the OK key CR Action gt loJ CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR 5 Press the A or V key to select CR Only LF and CR or I
15. 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting lt 01 TCP IP Setting WSD SCAN WSD PRINT 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears TCP IP Settings lt m IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select IPv6 Setting 8 146 Default Setting System Menu IPv6 Setting lt m o OfF On Exit Bonjour Settings Press the OK key IPv6 Setting appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu Select whether or not to use Bonjour The default setting is On Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting 1 Sys Menu Count Report Counter System Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login 2 System Network lt lol Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt m lol TCP IP Setting WSD SCAN WSD PRINT 5 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen w
16. Account Name gt 0 E Text Account ID OK The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Account List 7 Press the OK key Account List appears 8 Press Menu the Right Select key press the A or V key to select Add Account and then press the OK key 9 Enter the account name and press the OK key 10 Enter the account code and press the OK key NOTE Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used Enter any other account ID 11 20 Management 11 Press the A or V key to select Exit and then press the Sedep 01 lt OK OK key Neves ht Select Detail and press the OK key to see information of the registered accounts 12 Account List is displayed and the new account is added to the account list Managing Accounts This changes the registered account information or deletes the account Use the procedure below to manage accounts NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login scre
17. 5 Press A or V to select the desired MP tray priority mode 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 96 Default Setting System Menu Paper Feed Mode Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions The default setting is Auto Item Description Sets the paper feed direction automatically Sets the paper feed direction the same as in the previous printing operation Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select Paper Feed Mode Press the OK key Paper Feed Mode appears Press the A or V key to select Auto or Fixed Sys Menu Count select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer Exit 2 Printer 0m Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit 4 Paper Feed Mode fol Auto Fixed 5 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 97 Default Setting System Menu Auto Cass Change Select the action that takes place when the cassette runs out of paper during printing Selections are as follows The default setting is On Item Description The printer displays Load Cassette is a cassette number or Load MP Tray and stops printing Load the
18. 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Group Auth 11 11 Management 7 Press the OK key Group Auth appears Group Auth gt oK lo Offt On 8 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu Displaying Network User Propertiy Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication This menu can be used only when Netwk Authentic is selected as the user authentication method NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account 4 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and SE ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set User Job Account 0 Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 11 12 Management 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set m
19. 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired sending size 5 3 Sending Functions 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 4 Sending Functions Zoom Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size The table below lists the available options Item Detail No Zoom to be scanned at actual size Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size NOTE When zooming in or out see Sending Size on page 5 3 when selecting the sending size When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size the originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used Depending on the combination of original size and sending size the image is placed at the edge Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size 1 Press the Send key Place the original 2 3 Select the transmission size 4 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu bmg OK Original Size Oo Original Image o Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Zoom 6 Press the OK key Zoom appears Zoom Kad ox Auto 7 Press the A or V key to select 100 or Auto and
20. A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and Se press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears I F Block Set oK USB Device USB Storage Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select USB Device 8 174 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key USB Device appears USB Device gt oK o Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu USB Storage This locks and protects the USB interface connector USB Storage The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting Fi 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password with administrator privileges to log in and sity et E AEE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network
21. onnectto a Network Projector WSD Evu Connection Network Proje Prvatew Ti ennectto Nework Projector SDE Cennectios Network Preje Domain as onnect oa Network Projecter SD Ev Connectioa Network Anjen Private tow 2 conect to Network Projetor WSD Er Connect toe Network Praje Dornsin Aow Export List onnect to a Network Projector WSD In Connect toa Network Proje All Allow Help r 7 New Inbound Rule Wizard Rule Type Select the type of firewalll rule to create Steps Rule Type What type of rule would you like to create Protocol and Ports Action Program o Profle Rule that controls connections for a program Name Rule that controls connections for a TCP or UDP port Predefined Bra jent Retrie s HTTP Rule that controls connections for a Windows experience 5 Custom Custom rule Leam more about rule types L 4 r Dl New Inbound Rule Wizard Protocol and Ports Specify the protocols and ports to which this rule applies Steps o Ako Does this rule apply to TCP or UDP Protocol and Ports TCP Action 5 UDP Profile Name Does this rule apply to all local ports or specific local ports All local po Leam more about protocol and ports lt Back 2 Click Advanced settings 3 Click Inbound Rules 4 Click New Rule 5 Select Port and click Next 6 Select TCP select Specific local ports enter 445
22. 1 3 Part Names Machine COON OO FP WN 0 11 Document Processor Platen Power Switch Slit Glass Operation Panel Top Cover Front Cover Duplex Front Cover Drum Unit Main Charger Cleaner Lock Lever 12 Toner Container mii I Pa pet ji im Da 1 4 Part Names 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Z FS 19 20 Inner Tray Paper Length Adjusting Tab Paper Length Guide Paper Width Guides Cassette 1 Paper Width Adjusting Tab Paper Width Guides MP Tray MP Multi Purpose Tray Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 21 1 5 Part Names 22 23 24 25 26 27 j ll MUTI Min Ji Network Interface Connector USB Interface Connector Fuser Cover Handholds Rear Cover Power Cord Connector Document Processor 28 29 30 31 32 33 Document Processor Cover Original Width Guides Original Table Original Eject Table Original Stopper Document Processor Open Close Handle NY N NNN AN NY 1 6 2 Preparation before Use This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for Energy
23. Cancel Adding a port E Control Panel Home Y Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer pre System and Security Network and Intemet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardware and Sound Programs Pg User Accounts and Family Safety Appearance and Personalization Allow a program through Windows Firewall System View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Inde Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Checkforupdates View installed updates Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons Change when the computer sleeps g 2 2 Click Change settings select the File and Printer Sharing checkbox and click OK 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Check firewall status 2 42 Preparation before Use KA gt Control Panel System and Security Windows Firewall x f Search Contre Control Panel Home Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gain through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change not
24. Checking Remaining Paper 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status lt 0 appears ol Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select Paper Status 3 Press the OK key Paper Status appears Paper Status 0 Cassette 1 1 4 Press the lt or gt key to switch the display of remaining tett Empi paper amount among the main unit cassette optional mer l MEFE cassette if installed and MP tray 3 29 Basic Operation 3 30 4 Copying Functions This chapter explains the functions available for copying CIR IIAN SIZE ssnin aa e Original Orientation EcoPriNtasiisis e Combine Mode e Continuous Scan e Job Finish Notice File Name Entry e Print Override e Sharpness e Backgrnd Density 4 1 Copying Functions Original Size Specify the size of originals being scanned Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying process The following options are available Original Sizes Letter Legal Statement Executive Officio II A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom For instructions on how to specify the custom original size refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 7 Use the
25. Finish Binding 0m Select key and you can select the binding edge of the 01 deft Right finished copies and the original setting orientation HTop After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the Orig Orientation 0 finished copies and the original setting orientation iTop Edge Top If you select 2 sided gt gt 1 sided press Detail the Right Orig Binding lt 0 Select key and you can select the binding edge of the 01 AA Left Right original and the original setting orientation HTop R After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the Orig Orientation m original and finished copies and the original setting faiTop Edge Top orientation 3 13 Basic Operation Orig Binding Sma OK 01 AWLeft Right 02 HTop Finish Binding gt 01 AWLeft Right 02 HTop Orig Orientation 0 iTop Edge Top 02 itiTop Edge left Scanning Job No 9999 Page s 1 Cancel Set original and press Start key Job No 9999 Page s 3 Cancel End Scan If you select 2 sided gt gt 2 sided press Detail the Right Select key and you can select the binding edge of the original After pressing the OK key select the binding edge of the finished copies After pressing the OK key select the original setting orientation Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the s
26. Set the correct density level for auto density Is the machine in Manual Density mode Select the correct density level Copies have a moire pattern dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to Photo Printouts are not clear Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original Select appropriate image quality 10 2 Troubleshooting Symptom Printouts are dirty Check Points Is the platen or the document processor dirty Corrective Actions Clean the platen or the document processor Reference Page Printouts are fuzzy Is the machine being used in very humid conditions Use in a location that has suitable humidity Images are skewed Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals on the platen align them with the slit glass When placing originals in the document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Is the paper loaded correctly Check the position of the paper width guides Cannot feed originals Are the originals placed correctly When placing originals in the document processor align the original width guides securely before placing the originals Paper often jams Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly Is the paper of the supported typ
27. e Operation Panel cc0 ee ee eer ere eee ene 1 2 TUGGING adcineinieanenteeePivatviiaatiandis 1 1 Part Names Operation Panel Displays the Address Book screen where you can add edit and delete destinations Displays the System Menu Counter menu screen where you can check the system settings and counters Displays the Status screen where you can check the status print a status report and pause or cancel the job in process Displays the Copy screen where you can make settings required Calls the previous destination Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX number Displays the Confirm Destination screen where you can edit and delete destinations Displays the Add Destination screen where you can add destinations Switches between on hook and off hook when manually sending a FAX Message Display Check what is 19 26 Document Send te fe fg for copying shown here while operating the machine Selects the menu displayed at the lower right in the Message Display Address eem Menuj Status Co py Addres Recall Confirm Add ounter Job Cancel Book Pause Destinatioh Destination On Hook Processing Memory folder SMB FTP or FAX Displays the Document Box screen where you can operate t
28. platen 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select FTP Encrypted TX or ore Press the OK key FTP Encrypted TX appears FTP Encrypted TX m On 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu NOTE Click Security Settings gt Network Security in the Command Center RX Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings For details refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 5 21 Sending Functions File Separation Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page and send the files Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select File Separation 5 Press the OK key File Separation appears File Separation m lo Oft Each Page 6 Press the A or V key to
29. 03 New Setting ol Service Status Network Status Developer Exit lt gt wi 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Adjust Maint Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Press the A or V key to select Service Setting Press the OK key The Service Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select New Developer 8 120 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears New Developer Are you sure Yes No 7 Press Yes the Left Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu DP Adjustment DP Adjustment is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu 8 121 Default Setting System Menu Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One touch keys The saved destinations can be changed The destinations are available for Send as E mail Send to Folder and Fax Transmission NOTE Command Center RX can be used to efficiently save and edit multiple destinations Adding an Individual Destination A maximum of 200 individual addresses can be registered Each address can include the information such as destination name E mail address FTP server folder path computer folder path and FA
30. 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press GE the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and ri press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login J 4 The Date Settings menu appears Date Setting lt m Date Format Time Zone Exit Press the A or V key to select Date Format Press the OK key Date Format appears Date Format Kma oK Month Day Year Year Month Day Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Month Day Year Day Month Year or Year Month Day 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu 8 29 Default Setting System Menu Time Zone Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT Use the procedure below to set the time difference Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings Default Screen Sound Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Menu Login Date Setting lt m Date Format Time Zone Exit Time Zone m GMT Casablanca B5 GMT Greenwich GMT Monrovi
31. 8 10 Default Setting System Menu 7 6 Press the OK key The Custom PaperSize menu Custom PaperSize V0 appears ol Cassette 1 Size Cassette 2 Size Cassette 3 Size 7 Select the paper source in which you want to set the Size Entry Y oa OK custom size and press the OK key Size Entry Y 5 83 14 02 appears t 14 02 W 8 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length Y 9 Press the OK key Size Entry X appears Entry X aie OK 4 13 8 50 10 Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width X 11 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu Default Setting System Menu Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1 and optional paper feeders Cassette 2 and 3 The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Paper Size Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 Custom Media Type Plain 105 g m or less Rough Recycled Preprint Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 8 i Cassette 1 only To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Set on page 8 16 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 Use the
32. IMPORTANT Take care not to touch the transfer roller black during cleaning me 9 3 Maintenance 6 Onthedrum unit slide the main charger cleaner green back and forth 2 or 3 times to clean the charger wire then return it to its original position CLEANER HOME POSITION IMPORTANT Remove the fixing tape on the main charger cleaner before cleaning for the first time After cleaning make sure you restore the main charger cleaner to its home position 7 When cleaning is complete return the drum unit to the original position 8 Return the developer unit to its position aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine Then close the front cover 9 4 Maintenance Toner Container Replacement When the message display displays Add toner replace the toner Every time you replace the toner container be sure to clean the parts as instructed below Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality CAUTION Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container Dangerous sparks may cause burns Toner Container Replacement 1 Open the front cover 2 Turnthe toner container lock lever to the unlock position Push the toner container lock lever to the position marked by the arrow and pull out the toner container NOTE Put the old toner container in the plastic bag supplied with the new t
33. Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select NW User Property 7 Press the OK key NW User Property appears NW User Property gt lo OLL On 8 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu Unknown login user name Job This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID i e unsent IDs If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown The table below shows the available settings ree e Reject The job is rejected not printed Permit The job is permitted to be printed Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 11 13 Management Sys Menu Count 0m User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password
34. Press the A or V key to select the desired image quality Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 10 Sending Functions Adjusting Density Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below 1 2 3 Function Menu Kad OK 01 Color Selection O Original Size m Original Image o Exit 4 Density pata oK OVE Lighter 1 05 EaNormal 0 06 fAbDarker 1 6 7 8 Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Density Press the OK key Density appears Press the A or V key to select your desired density Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 11 Sending Functions Scan Resolution Select the fineness of scanning resolution The finer the scanning becomes the larger the number becomes the better the image quality becomes However better resolution also results in larger file size file
35. Index 5 Index Z Preset Zoom 3 10 Zoom Mode Zoom Copying Copy 3 10 5 5 Auto Zoom 3 10 Send 5 5 Manual Zoom 3 10 Index 6 H PASSIONATE PEOPLE FROM ALL OVER THE WORLD KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Bloemlaan 4 2132 NP Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Fax 31 20 653 1256 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B V Beechavenue 25 1119 RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 5877200 Fax 31 20 5877260 KYOCERA Document Solutions U K Limited Eldon Court 75 77 London Road Reading Berkshire RG1 5BS United Kingdom Phone 44 118 931 1500 Fax 44 118 931 1108 KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S p A Via Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N MI Italy Phone 39 02 921791 Fax 39 02 92179 600 KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N V Sint Martinusweg 199 201 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 7209270 Fax 32 2 7208748 KYOCERA Document Solutions France S A S Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de Orme 91195 Gif sur Yvette CEDEX France Phone 33 1 69852600 Fax 33 1 69853409 KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 6318392 Fax 34 91 6318219 KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy Atomitie 5C 00370 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 47805200 Fax 358 9 47805390 KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B V Amsterdam NL Z rich Br
36. NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges Printing Reports Printable reports are as follows Menu map Outputs a menu map of this machine Menu Map MFP Firmware Version Status Page Check the information including current settings available memory space and optional equipment installed Status Page MFP Firmware Version 8 111 Default Setting System Menu Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine Scalable Bitmap Selection FSET Font Optional Network Status Font Name Scalable Bitmap LELLLLLI LELLLLLLI LELLE LELLLLLI LLLLLLLLI LE Passwort d Selection FSET Font ID anal TTT onan annt CELI TTT TT Labeda You can view information on the installed network interface card or wireless interface card Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map Status Page Font List Opt NW Status Sys Menu Count Counter System Network Exit Report 0m Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit Report Print lt Status Page Font List Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Report 2 Press the OK key The Report menu appears Press the A or V key to select Report Print Press the OK key The Report Print menu appears 5 Press the
37. Paper Weight Exit Custom X Sma OK lol Paper Weight Duplex Name Exit Duplex pata OK Prohibit Exit Custom X Sma OK lol Paper Weight Duplex Name Exit Name Entry 0 RD Centeri ABC Custom X lol Paper Weight Duplex Name Exit 11 Press the A or V key to select the weight of paper 12 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected paper type When the selected paper type is Custom 1 to 8 you can further set whether to enable or disable duplex and the name of the custom paper type 13 Press the A or V key to select Duplex 14 Press the OK key The Duplex menu appears 15 Press the A or V key to select whether to enable or disable duplex 16 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type 17 Press the A or V key to select Name 18 Press the OK key Name Entry is displayed Enter the name of the custom paper type NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 19 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the selected custom paper type 8 18 Default Setting System Menu Media for Auto Selection When Auto is selected in Paper Selection the paper source that
38. Reference Page 10 10 Troubleshooting Error Message Send error HH Check Points Corrective Actions 2101 2102 2103 2201 2202 2203 3101 The network cable is disconnected or the hub that it is connected to is not operating properly Check the cable and the hub Otherwise the server name or the host name of the SMTP server is not set correctly Use Command Center RX and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly 2204 Check the E mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the Command Center RX 5101 5102 5103 5104 7102 720f Turn the power switch off and back on If this error occurs several times make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative Refer to the corrective action for the error message An error has occurred 9181 The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999 Send the excess pages separately Reference Page The developer unit is not installed Is the developer unit installed correctly Contact your service technician The phone receiver is off the hook Hang Up Put down the receiver Toner is running out Prepare the toner container Unknown toner Installed PC Does the installed toner container s regional specification match the machines s Install the specified container USB memory error Job is canceled This job is canceled Press the OK key
39. Send Exit 2 Press the OK key The Send menu appears Send 0m lol Select Key Set Destinat ionCheck Default Screen Exit Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set 4 Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Select Key Set m 8 Right Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Left or Right 6 Press the OK key This displays the function selection Left gt 0 screen for the flexible key selected in step 5 The screen Density shown is the one when Left is selected FTP Encrypted TX 7 Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered This function is to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered already registered is displayed 8 101 Default Setting System Menu Destination confirmation screen before transmission You can specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears after the Start key is pressed or after a destination is added or edited before transmission The table below shows the available settings Item Detail Check beforeSend Specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears before transmission Check New Dest
40. User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login User Job Account gt User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set m 01 Job Accounting AccountingAccess Account Report Exit AccountingAccess 0m Network 1 Set the job accounting access Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting access setting Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select AccountingAccess Press the OK key AccountingAccess appears Press the A or V key to select Local or Network 11 18 Management 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account Set menu NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue
41. When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen 7 9 Status Job Cancel Displaying Send Job Log Status pata OK Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Send Job Log pata oK 0004 Broadcast OK 0003 40756545865 OK 0002 MMorgan kyoc A Detail 0004 Detail 0 Result 1 9 OK Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Send Job Log Press the OK key Send Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the send log A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally A Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Send Job Status screen on page 7 4 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Select key to check the detailed information of the selected send log Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Destination 7 10 Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail
42. page 5 5 page 5 7 page 5 14 page 5 9 page 5 15 page 5 19 page 5 11 page 5 6 page 5 23 page 5 24 System Menu Counter key Continued on next page Report Report Print Menu Map Status Page Font List Opt NW Status Admin Rpt Set Outgoing FAX Rpt Incoming FAX Rpt Result Rpt Send Result E mail Folder SEINE o FAX CancelBeforeSe nd Dest Info FAX RX Result JobFinish Notice Job Log Auto Sending History Send History Destination Confirmation Register Subject SSFC Log Subject Personal Info Counter System Network Network TCP IP Top ye setting Settings IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Bonjour BrE Detail WSD SCAN WSD PRINT IPSec Continued on next page Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface page 8 111 page 8 111 page 8 112 page 8 112 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 8 114 page 8 114 page 8 114 page 8 114 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 7 13 page 7 13 page 7 13 page 7 13 page 7 13 page 7 13 page 7 18 page 11 38 page 8 137 page 8 137 page 8 146 page 8 147 page 8 151 page 8 149 page 8 150 page 8 154 page 8 154 page 8 136 Xi System Menu
43. the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination press Detail the Right Select key in Destination to see the complete destination name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When there are two or more destinations press List the Right Select key in Destination to display the destination list Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key This displays the complete name of the destination Press the OK key to return to the destination list Pressing Exit the Right Select key while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen Displaying Store Job Log Status Pause lt gt OK 0I Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status 0008 scan Store Job Log Pad OK OK 0009 maury s data A Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Store Job Log Press the OK key Store Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the store queue Ajob result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally A Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Store Job Status screen on page 7 6 0010 aaaa A
44. 7 15 Status Job Cancel Automatic Job Log History Transmission This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History m select Auto Sending Send History Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key Auto Sending appears Auto Sending pata OK off 02 On 3 Press the A or V key to select Off or On If you select On and press the OK key Jobs appears Jobs aa OK Use the numeric keys to enter the number of jobs to be 1 16 sent at a time HERES jobs 4 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu Manual Job Log History Transmission You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History m select Send History Auto Sending Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Send the job log history Are you sure Yes No 7 16 Status Job Cancel IMPORTANT If no destination is registered Enter Enter destination destination is displayed Refer to Registering Destination on
45. 7 Press the OK key The MP Tray Set menu appears MP Tray Set Sma OK MP Tray Size MP Tray Type Exit 8 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Size 2 57 Preparation before Use MP Tray Size pata OK Legal D Statement F MP Tray Set Sma OK MP Tray Size MP Tray Type Exit MP Tray Type pata OK Transparency Rough 10 11 12 13 Press the OK key MP Tray Size appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Type Press the OK key MP Tray Type appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu 2 58 Preparation before Use Loading Originals Follow the steps below to load originals for copying sending or storing Placing Originals on the Platen You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals 1 Open the original cover or the document processor iam TT NOTE Before opening the document processor be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document pro
46. Detail 0009 Detail 0 Result 1 9 Error 10200 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Select key to check the detailed information of the selected job Status Job Cancel Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Sender Info destination information When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen 7 12 Status Job Cancel Sending the Job Log History You can send the job log history by e mail You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached Displaying Job Log History Menu Sys Menu Count 0m 01 Report Counter System Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J Sys Menu Count 0m Counter System Report pata OK Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit Report pai
47. Envelope Thick High Quality and Custom 1 8 To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Set on page 2 56 Preparation before Use NOTE If using the machine with the FAX function installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX the available media types are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality Rough Labels Envelope Cardstock and Thick 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Login User Name W not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the When you are performing user management and have user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters When you are not performing user management go to step 2 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings 3 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lt m Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 7 5 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Set
48. Exit Optional Network gt Basic Exit 1 5 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Optional Network Press the OK key The Optional Network screen appears Press the A or V key to select Basic 8 170 Default Setting System Menu Basic A Km OK 01 Host Name TCP IP Settings Bonjour Exit Restart Are you sure Yes f No 6 Press the OK key The Basic menu screen appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Restart Network 8 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The message Restarting appears and the network is restarted Pressing No the Right Select key returns to the Basic menu without restarting the network 8 171 Default Setting System Menu NW InterfaceSend The client function such as the network authentication and the reference of user information via LDAP operates only by the selected interface This function is mainly used for the network system administrator For more information about each function refer to Command Center RX User Guide 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count m
49. Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Scan Resolution 8 46 Default Setting System Menu N 6 Press the OK key Scan Resolution appears Scan Resolution m 200x400dpi S Fin 04 300x300dpi 400x400dpi U Fin 7 Press the A or V key to select 200x100dpi Norm 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi S Fin 300x300dpil 400x400dpi U Fin or 600x600dpil 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Original Image Copy Set the default original document type for copying The available default settings are shown below Item Description Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos Light Text Line Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for copying 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default gt 0m Scan Resolut
50. Language 3 Press the A or V key to select Sound Default Screen Sound Exit 4 Press the OK key Sound appears Sound Km OK FAX Speaker FAX Monitor Exit Press the A or V key to select Buzzer Press the OK key Buzzer appears Buzzer Pad OK lol Key Confirmation 7 Press the A or V key to select Key Confirmation Job finish Ready Exit 8 6 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key Key Confirmation appears Key Confirmation gt Off 9 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Buzzer menu Display Bright Set the brightness of the display Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings bmg OK appears lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Display Bright 4 Press the OK key Display Bright appears Display Bright m Darker 1 04 Normal 0 Lightertl 5 Press the A or V key to select the display brightness from Darker 3 to Lighter 3 6 Press the OK key
51. Make this setting when you use IPSec The default setting is Off and that of Rule Setting is also Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and C RE A E press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting lt TCP IP Setting WSD SCAN WSD PRINT 5 Press the A or V key to select IPSec 8 154 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key IPSec appears IPSec gt On 7 Press the A or V key to select On or Off F If you select On and press the OK key Rule Setting Rule Setting gt 0 appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Setting menu SSL Setting Gq This allows you to use SSL network security for communication You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is
52. Paper Feeder 10 14 Precaution 10 13 Paper Selection 4 3 Cassette 4 3 Multi Purpose Tray 4 4 Part Names 1 1 Platen Placing Originals 2 59 POP3 Appendix 24 PostScript Appendix 24 Power Cable Connecting 2 5 Power Off 2 6 Power On 2 6 PPM Appendix 24 Preparation 2 1 Preparing Cables 2 4 Printer Setup 8 84 Printer Driver Appendix 24 Printer Settings 8 84 Auto Cass Change 8 98 Copies 8 90 CR Action 8 93 Duplex 8 89 EcoPrint 8 87 Emulation 8 84 Form Feed Timeout 8 92 Job Name 8 94 LF Action 8 92 MP Tray Priority 8 96 Orientation 8 91 Override A4 Letter 8 88 Resolution 8 99 User Name 8 95 Printing 3 16 Printing from a Job Box 6 8 Printing from Applications 3 16 Printing Reports Sending Notice 8 111 Font List 8 112 Network Status Page 8 113 Optional Network Status 8 112 Service Status Page 8 113 Status Page 8 111 Transmission Result Reports 8 114 Private Print 6 8 Product Library 2 2 Q Quick Copy mode 6 10 Quick Setup Screen Changing Registration 8 82 8 100 8 109 R RAM Disk Mode 8 74 Resolution Appendix 20 Appendix 21 Restarting the System 8 135 S Safety Conventions i Index 4 Index Scan Resolution 5 12 Default settings 8 46 Send Backgrnd Density 5 24 File Format 5 9 Image Quality 5 10 Original Size Selection 5 2 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Setup 8 100 Sharpness 5 23 Sending Send as E mail 3 19 Send to Folder FTP 3 23 Send to Folder SMB 3 23 Sending Functions 5 1 Se
53. Print Resolution XPS FitTo Page 4 Press the OK key JPEG TIFF Print appears Press the A or V key to select the the desire print mode The print modes are as follows Paper Size scaled to fit the paper size Image Resolution matched to the image resolution Print Resolution matched to the print resolution Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu If you select On in this setting XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing If you select off the data is printed at its original size Function Menu Paper Selection Duplex Exit om 01 Collate O oO Oo XPS FitTo Page 02 On lo OfFt lt gt OK Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select XPS FitTo Page Press the OK key XPS FitTo Page appears Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Document Box Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine You can store files in PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS format
54. Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead High Quality Custom 1 to 8 MP Tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper Size Front Cassette Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Minimum 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 Duplex 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 Cassette Option Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Minimum 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 MP Tray Maximum 8 1 2 x 14 Legal Minimum 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 A6 Duplex 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 A5 Paper Capacity Front Cassette 250 sheets 80 g m MP Tray 50 sheets 80 g m plain paper A4 Letter or less Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets 80 g m Memory Standard 512 MB Maximum 1536 MB Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Option e KUIO slot 1 For ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn Operating Environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 Altitude 8 200 feet 2 500 m or less Brightness 1 500 lux or less Warm up Time 22 C 71 6 F 60 Power on 20 seconds or less Low Power Mode 1 second or less Sleep 15 seconds or less Appenadix 18 Item Description Dimension W x D x H ECOSYS M2030
55. Sending Functions Sending Size Select the sending size the size of image to be sent The table below lists the sizes Sending Same as OrigSize Legal Letter Statement Executive Sizes Offcio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 and Youkei 2 Relationship between Original Size Sending Size and Zoom Original Size page 5 2 Sending Size and Zoom page 5 5 are related to each other Refer to the following table Original Size and the size you the same different wish to send as are Original Size Specify as Specify as necessary necessary Sending Size Select Same as Select the OrigSize required size Zoom Select 100 Select Auto or Auto NOTE When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size and select the Zoom 100 you can send the image as the actual size No Zoom Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Sending Size Press the OK key Sending Size appears Sending Size pata OK fol Same as OrigSize Letter Legal
56. The table below shows the available settings Item Description Paper Size Scaled to fit the paper size Image Resolution Matched to the image resolution Print Resolution Matched to the print resolution NOTE Refer to page 6 3 for JPEG TIFF Print Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG TIFF Print setting Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit JPEG TIFF Print 0m Image Resolution Print Resolution 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select JPEG TIFF Print Press the OK key JPEG TIFF Print appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Paper Size Image Resolution or Print Resolution 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 61 Default Setting System Menu XPS FitTo Page Select the XPS FitTo Page default NOTE Refer to page 6 4 for XPS FitTo Page Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Co
57. To select all files press Menu the Left Select key and select Select All To deselect all files select Clear All To show file details select Detail 9 Press the OK key The file print and delete selection menu appears 10 Press the A or V key to select Print and press the OK key NOTE To delete the selected file without printing it select Delete and press the OK key The ID entry screen appears Enter the ID and press the OK key The file deletion confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Completed appears and the file is deleted 11 The ID entry screen appears Enter the ID and press the OK key 12 The number of copies screen appears Set the number of copies and press the OK key The number of copies specified in the print job is displayed in of Copies 13 The file print confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted appears and printing begins 6 9 Document Box Quick Copy mode This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed If a document is printed with Proof and hold selected in the printer driver the document will be simultaneously stored on the RAM disk The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel If more documents than the set maximum are stored the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored When the machine power is turned
58. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting Sys Menu Count Report Counter Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit I F Block Set Km oK USB Device USB Storage Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set 4 Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select USB Host 8 173 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key USB Host appears USB Host O o Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the I F Block Set menu USB Device USB interface setting This locks and protects the USB interface connector B1 USB Device The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit
59. and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 6 Sending Functions Original Orientation To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly specify the upper orientation of original To use the functions below select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen 1 sided 2 sided Selection When placing the original on the platen Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing the original on the document processor O Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Kma oK Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Orig Orientation oe 5 Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears Orig Orientation gt TE Edge Top Edge Left 5 7 Sending Functions Press the A or V key to select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press
60. appears NOTE Press the OK key to edit delete the current destination Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 Press Exit the Right Select key The basic screen reappears 7 14 Status Job Cancel Registering Destination Destination Kad OK Confirmation Register 1 Inthe Destination menu press the A or V key to select Register 2 Press the OK key Register appears To select a destination from the address book press the A or V key to select Address Book and then press the OK key This displays the address book Select your desired destination NOTE For selecting a destination from the address book refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 25 Exit Register pag OK 01 Address Book Address Entry Completed Register Sma OK Address Book OJxAddress Entr To directly enter a destination press the A or V key to select Address Entry and then press the OK key This displays an entry screen Enter the destination address directly 3 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Destination menu NOTE If the address of the selected destination has been changed after you selected the destination from the address book is displayed before Address Entry Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 7 14 and reconfirm the destination address
61. go to step 2 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings 2 54 Preparation before Use Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set m Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Cassette 1 Set 0m Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type Exit Cassette 1 Size gt m a5 Dp ach 3 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select from Cassette 1 Set to Cassette 3 Set NOTE Cassette 2 and Cassette 3 are shown when the optional cassettes are installed Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette Cassette 1 Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette Cassette 2 and 3 7 Press the OK key The Cassette 1 Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Size Press the OK key Cassette 1 Size appears 10 Press the A or V key to select the desired paper size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu 2 55 Preparation before Use Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Set 0m Cassette 1 Type 11 Press the A or V
62. on es meme be eee Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind Status Idle C Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used w Default paper size A4 E i gl Click the lock to prevent further changes 8 Click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the IP address and printer name The number entered in Address will automatically appear in Name Change if needed NOTE When using a Bonjour connection select Default and click the item that appears in Printer Name The driver with the same name as the machine automatically appears in Driver 9 Select the options available for the printer and click Continue 10 The selected printer is added 2 24 Preparation before Use Uninstalling the Software Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer g NOTE Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Welcome to the Software Remove Wizard This wizard helps you remove software for your printing system Please close all your applications before continuing Select All Clear All K KYOCERA Cancel 1 Click Start button on the Windows and then select All Programs Kyocera and Uninstall Kyocera Product Library to display the U
63. 1 5 EaNormal 0 0 M bDarker 1 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Density Press the OK key Density appears Press the A or V key to select your desired density Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins 3 8 Basic Operation Selecting Image Quality Select image quality suited to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Image Quality Option Description Text Photo For originals with both text and photographs Photo For photos taken with a camera Text For originals primarily consisting of text Light Text Line Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu paid OK Collate Oo Duplex O Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select Original Image 3 Press the OK key Original Image appears Original Image Sma OK Photo Text 4 Press the A or V key to select the image quality suited to the type of original 5 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 6 Press the Start key Copying begins 3 9 Basic Operation Zoom Copying Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image
64. 9999 0000 13 Press the A or V key or numeric keys to set the unlock code 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 44 Default Setting System Menu Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm up is completed or the Reset key is pressed Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending Setting the frequently used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier Color Selection Select the default color mode setting The available default settings are shown below Color mode Description Auto Color Gray Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale Auto Color B amp W Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White Full Color Scan document in full color Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish Black amp White Scan document in black and white Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Sett
65. A or V key to select Local User List 7 Press the OK key Local User List appears 8 Press Menu the Right Select key press the A or V key to select Add User and then press the OK key 9 Enter the user name and press the OK key enter the login user name in the next screen and then press the OK key Management s User01 Sma OK Detail Local User List gt m amp DeviceAdmin amp Admin Menu Detail lt 0 Login Password 3 6 SSSR Edit Detail 0 MeE mailAddress 4 6 abcdef jp Edit Detail lt OK Access Level 5 6 Administrator Change Detail lt OK Account Name 6 6 e RD Center Change 10 11 12 13 14 15 Press the A or V key to select Exit and then press the OK key Select Detail and press the OK key to see information of the registered users In Local User List press the A or V key to select the added user and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to select Login Password press Edit the Right Select key enter the login password and then press the OK key Enter the same login password to confirm and press the OK key Press the gt key to select E mailAddress press Edit the Right Select key enter the e mail address and then press the OK key Press the gt key to select Access Level
66. A or V key to select Menu Map Status Page Font List or Opt NW Status 8 112 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Print Are you sure The screen shown is the one when Status Page is Status Page selected Yes No 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The selected report is output Accepted is displayed and the screen returns to the Report Print menu NOTE When acceptance of jobs is prohibited Print storing functions are restricted now is displayed and the output is canceled Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose Network Status Page GE Check the information including network interface firmware version network address and protocol Network Status Page MFP Firmware Version Use the procedure below to print a Service Status Network Status 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 4 Edit Destination Exit _ 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt Send Box Density Backgrnd Density Exit 8 113 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Service Setting 4 Press the OK key Service Setting
67. ABC Text Body Entry paid ox ABC Text 1 Use the procedure below to set the default e mail subject and message body In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Subject Body Press the OK key Subject Entry appears Enter the e mail subject up to 60 characters If you press the Back key you can return to the Function Default menu Press the OK key Body Entry appears Enter e mail body text up to 500 characters If you press the Back key you can return to Subject Entry Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 57 Default Setting System Menu Con scan ExptFAX Set the continuous scan defaults The available default settings are shown below D Off Continuous scan not performed On Continuous scan performed Refer to page 4 6 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m
68. After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying 3 5 Basic Operation Message Display The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display Ready to copy SallyGHHHHHHHEH HE 1 sided Dupi ah WN a Aa Copier Screen Send Screen Reference Meanin number g 1 Indicates the current status of the machine Also displays the title of the current menu whenever the operation panel is being used Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed The meaning of each icon is as indicated below The standard paper cassette is currently selected When this icon is displayed as there is no paper is the cassette The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected When this icon is displayed as 7 or 4 there is no paper is the cassette The MP Tray is currently selected When this icon is displayed as there is no paper is the MP Tray Displays the size of the original s Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the left or right Select keys Displays the number of copies Displays the paper size to be copied Displays the number of destinations
69. Contrast on or off E Folder Options d pecity single or double click to open Show hidden files and folders Fonts Preview delete or show and hide fonts Change Font Settings Adjust ClearType text NVIDIA Control Panel Windows XP click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools In Windows 8 select Settings in charms on Desktop and select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options 2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard Recommended in Advanced settings E hl Folder Options Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Icons that you are using for this folder to all folders of this type _ e Reset Folders Advanced settings Launch folder windows in a separate process a Restore previous folder windows at logon V Show drive letters V Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color V Show pop up description for folder and desktop items v Show preview handlers in preview pane Use Sharing Wizard Recommended Automatically type into the Search Box Select the typed item in the view Restore Defaults C ok Cancel Apply In Windows XP click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing Recommended in Advanced settings 3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen 2 38 Preparation before Use V Share this folder Settings S
70. Counter key Continued from previous page Continued on next page System Network ented rom previous page Optional Basic Host Name Network TE 2 Settings Bonjour IPSEC LAN Interface Restart Network NW InterfaceSend I f Block Set Security Level Restart Op Functions User Job Account User Login User Login DSE o Local User List ID Card Setting Group Auth NW User Property Job Job Accounting NGCOUINE o GSI o AccountingAccess Account Report Total Accounting Each Job Account Account List Detail Edit Delete Add Account Default Apply Limit Setting Copy Print Count Counter Limit Unknown ID Job User Property Common Settings Continued on next page Language Default Screen page 8 164 page 8 166 page 8 167 page 8 169 page 8 170 page 8 172 page 8 173 page 8 177 page 8 135 page 8 177 page 11 2 page 11 6 page 11 11 page 11 12 page 11 15 page 11 18 page 11 36 page 11 32 page 11 32 page 11 21 page 11 21 page 11 19 page 11 27 page 11 23 page 11 29 page 11 13 page 8 3 page 8 5 xii System Menu Counter key Continued from previous page Continued on next page Common Settings Continued from previous page Cont
71. Description Power ECOSYS Standard 431 W European countries Consump M2030dn PN With options 461 W European countries tion During printing ECOSYS Standard 431 W European countries M2030dn With options 461 W European countries ECOSYS Standard 460W U S A Canada 439 W European countries M2035dn With options 495 W U S A Canada 446 W European countries ECOSYS Standard 431 W European countries M2530dn With options 461 W European countries ECOSYS Standard 467 W U S A Canada 439 W European countries M2535dn With options 495 W U S A Canada 446 W European countries Options ECOSYS Paper feeder up to 2 units Expanded memory Network Interface Kit M2030dn Wireless Network Interface Kit Card Authentication Kit B ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS Paper feeder up to 2 units Expanded memory Card Authentication Kit B M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn The 30 ppm model may not be available in some regions Copy functions Item Description Copy Speed Simplex ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn A4 R Letter R 30 32 sheets min Legal 26 sheets min B5R 24 sheets min A5 R A6 R 17 sheets min ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn A4 R Letter R 35 37 sheets min Legal 30 sheets min B5 R 24 sheets min A5 R A6 R 17 sheets min ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn A4 R Letter R 17 18 sheets min Legal 16 sheets min ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M25365dn A4 R Letter R 19 20 sheets min Leg
72. Exit 8 159 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Secure Protocol lt m IPP Security HTTP Security LDAP Security Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select LDAP Security 8 Press the OK key LDAP Security appears LDAP Security lt m SSL TLS STARTTLS 9 Press the A or V key to select Off SSL TLS or STARTTLS 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu SMTP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP server The default setting is Off NOTE SMTP E mail TX must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 151 The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not use security employed by the SMTP server SSL TLS Encryption is applied any data communication To enable SMTP security the SMTP port may have to be changed according to the server settings Typically 465 for SSL TLS is well known SMTP port STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication Typically 25 or 587 for STARTTLS is well known SMTP port You can change the port number using Command Center RX Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt se
73. It is often used for further identification of the machine The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters Function Defaults Change the function default settings in Common Job Default Settings page 2 35 Preparation before Use Registering Destinations You can register destinations to the machine s Address Book from Command Center RX 1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on 2 30 2 From the Address Book menu click Machine Address Book KYOCERA A Home Q Admin Ga Device Information EZ sob Status gt AA Document Box cCXxemna Aagess Book Settings One Touch Key Yene Settings gt DA Function Settings gt Function Settings E mail Add Group Z O Command Center FEX Delete Model Last Updated 2013 08 23 13 38 42 3 Click Add 4 Enter the destination information Enter the information for the destination you want to register The fields to populate are the same as when registering via operation panel Registering Specifying Destination on page 3 25 5 Click Submit 2 36 Preparation before Use Preparation for sending a document to a PC Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your computer Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation The details of the screens will vary in other versions of Windows NOT
74. Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select PDF A Press the OK key PDF A appears Press the A or V key to select Off PDF A 1a or PDF A 1b Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 72 Default Setting System Menu Login Operation Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled Item Description Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter characters Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from the character palette that appears Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu GE Common Settings 0m appears Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Login Operation Press the OK key Login Operation appears Login Operation 0m Use Numeric Ke Select Charac
75. OK key Size Entry X appears Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width X Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 8 Default Setting System Menu Default Original Size Setup In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray select the paper size to be used as the default value Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings lt m appears lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set qe Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Press the A or V key to select Def Orig Size Press the OK key Def Orig Size appears Def Orig Size Wm loi Letter 4a Legal 4 Statement 4 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper size to be used as the default value 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 9 Default Setting System Menu Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Pa
76. OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 4 The Timer Settings menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Sleep Timer 8 39 Default Setting System Menu R 6 Press the OK key Sleep Timer appears Sleep Timer 0 1 240 E 7 Press the A or V key to set the Sleep Timer Set the amount of time before entering the sleep state in minutes You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time automatically reset settings and return to the default setting NOTE Refer to page 8 45 for the default settings e Auto Panel Reset ON OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting The default setting is On mN 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key t
77. Press the A or V key to select Language 2 9 Preparation before Use Language pata OK loJ English Deutsch Francais 6 7 Press the OK key Language appears Press the A or V key to select the desired language and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 2 10 Preparation before Use Setting Date and Time Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation When you send an E mail using the transmission function the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E mail message Set the date time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used NOTE Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time System Menu Counter S Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Language Sound Common Settings Default Screen Exit lt gt OK Login User Name Login Password Login Time Zone Date Setting 01 Date Time Date Format Exit om 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 3 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Date Sett
78. Resolution appears Resolution lt m 01 300dpi 600dpi Fast1200 5 Press the A or V key to select 300dpi 600dpi or Fast1200 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 99 Default Setting System Menu Sending Settings The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options e Select Key Set 8 100 e Destination Check 8 102 e Default Screen 8 103 e Send and Forward 8 103 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when using sending functions You can register one of the following functions to each key e None e Color Selection e Original Size Original Image Scan Resolution Sending Size e Zoom e Orig Orientation e Continuous Scan File Format e File Name Entry e Subject Body e JobFinish Notice e FAX Resolution e FAX Direct TX e FAX Delayed TX e FAX RX Polling FAX TX Report e Density e Duplex e FTP Encrypted TX e File Separation e Sharpness e Backgrnd Density 8 100 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set F 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt select Send Copy Printer
79. Saver Function loading papers and originals e Check bundled items sich E each ceotipieea 2 2 e Determining the Conigatlon Method a d Preparat Cables 2 3 E e Cables A A ee PONET OMN OI Beem meneame ieee Rene Reenter omen ere eect oer er 2 6 e Energy Saver Function Carer te E REA T e Switching the ree i Display aani TTE 2 9 Setting Date and THC scsccciicicrsrevnsaeconvwinans 211 e iad girai Cable Connection 05 2 14 2 1 Preparation before Use Check bundled items Check that the following items have been bundled e Quick Installation Guide e Safety Guide e Safety Guide ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn e DVD Product Library Documents Contained in the Included DVD The following documents are contained in the included DVD Product Library Refer to them as necessary Documents Operation Guide This Guide FAX Operation Guide Command Center RX User Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 2 2 Preparation before Use Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network and prepare the necessary cables Connection Example Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or networ
80. Set menu 8 15 Default Setting System Menu Media Type Set Useable paper types can be set on the machine for printing In addition to pre selected paper custom paper can be selected and the weight can be defined A paper type can be defined from the operation panel Useable paper types and factory set paper weights are shown below A paper weight and print density can be changed as needed IMPORTANT When a paper weight is changed toner fusing problems may cause flaws in the printed image Default display in the operation panel Paper Type _ 4 Duplex path Paper MP tray Cassetto Paper Weight Paper source Plain Yes Normal2 Transparency Yes Extra Heavy Preprinted Yes Normal2 Labels Yes Heavy1 Bond Yes Normal3 Yes Normal2 Yes Light Yes Normal3 Letterhead Yes Normal3 Color Yes Normal3 Prepunched Yes Normal2 Envelope Yes No Heavy3 Cardstock Yes No Heavy3 Thick Yes No Heavy3 High quality Yes Yes Normal2 Custom 1 to 8 Yes Yes Normal2 Yes Can be stored No Cannot be stored 4 This is a paper type defined and registered by the user Up to eight types of user settings may be defined User can also enable or disable the duplex path when using Custom For Custom 1 8 settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed Item Description Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed Permit Duplex pri
81. Setting and press the OK key 8 41 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login Timer Setting gt m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit PanelReset Timer 5 495 EERE sc A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Panel Reset Timer Press the OK key Panel Reset Timer appears Press the A or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer Set the amount of time before resetting the message display on the panel in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 42 Default Setting System Menu Unusable Time This feature sets a time period during which the machine will not print received faxes Faxes received during this Unusable Time are printed when the setting is unlocked IMPORTANT When Unusable Time is set in addition to fax printing all other printing operations are prohibited during the unusable time period including printing of copy jobs and printer jobs and printing from USB memory Faxes and print jobs received during the unusable time period are printed after the unusable time period ends or when the unusable time period
82. Size Orig Orientation Original Image Density EcoPrint Continuous Scan File Name Entry JobFinish Notice Print Override Sharpness Backgrnd Density Send key Continued on next page Function Menu key Continued on next page Color Selection Original Size Original Image Scan Resolution Sending Size Zoom Orig Orientation Continuous Scan File Format File Name Entry Subject Body JobFinish Notice FAX Resolution FAX Delayed TX FAX Direct TX page 4 3 page 3 15 page 3 12 page 3 10 page 4 9 page 4 2 page 4 6 page 3 9 page 3 8 page 4 8 page 4 13 page 4 16 page 4 14 page 4 17 page 4 18 page 4 19 page 5 13 page 5 2 page 5 10 page 5 12 page 5 3 page 5 5 page 5 7 page 5 14 page 5 9 page 5 15 page 5 16 page 5 19 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide viii Send key Function Menu key Continued from __ Continued from previous previous page page FAX RX Polling FAX TX Report Density Duplex FIP Encrypted TX File Separation Sharpness Backgrnd Density Document Box key Sub Address Box Polling Box Refer to the FAX Operation Gu
83. Sleep Level models except for Europe 8 37 Sleep Rules models for Europe 8 36 Sleep Timer 8 39 Time Zone 8 30 Index 1 Index Default 8 45 2 in 1 8 63 4 in 1 8 64 Backgrnd Copy 8 52 Backgrnd Send 8 53 Collate Offset 8 50 Color Selection Copy 8 45 Con scan ExptFAX 8 58 Continuous Scan 8 58 Density 8 49 EcoPrint 8 54 E mail Subject Body 8 57 File Format 8 59 File Name 8 55 File Separation 8 60 Image Quality 8 70 JPEG TIFF Print 8 61 Original Image Copy 8 47 Original Image Send 8 48 Original Orientation 8 51 PDF A 8 72 Scan Resolution 8 46 XPS FitTo Page 8 62 Zoom 8 49 Default Gateway Appendix 23 Default Screen 8 5 Density Adjustment Copy 3 8 Send 5 11 Destination 8 122 Adding 8 122 Adding a Group 8 127 Choosing by One Touch Key 3 27 Choosing from the Address Book 3 25 Editing 8 131 One touch Key 8 133 Search 3 25 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 27 Device 7 20 Checking Status 7 20 Configuring 7 21 DHCP Appendix 23 Disp Status Log 8 76 Document Box 6 1 Document Processor Appendix 22 How to Load Originals 2 60 Loading Originals 2 60 Not Supported Originals 2 60 Supported Originals 2 60 Document processor open close handle 1 6 dpi Appendix 23 Duplex 3 12 8 89 DVD 2 2 E EcoPrint Mode Appendix 23 Copy 4 8 Print 8 87 E mail Send as E mail 3 19 Emulation Appendix 23 Selection 8 84 Energy Star Program xxvi Enter E mail Subject and Body 5 16 Entry Bo
84. Specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears when the destination is new 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt select Send Copy Printer Send Exit 2 Press the OK key The Send menu appears Send lt m DestinationCheck Default Screen Exit Press the A or V key to select DestinationCheck Press the OK key The destination confirmation menu DestinationCheck lt appears 01I Check beforeSend Check New Dest Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Check beforeSend or Check New Dest 6 Press the OK key The menu of the selected function Check beforeSend appears fol Oft On The screen when the Check before Send menu is selected is shown 7 Press the A or V key to select the desired function 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu 8 102 Default Setting System Menu Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Send Copy Printer Send Exit 2 Press the OK key The Send menu appears Send lt m DestinationCheck Default Screen Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Default Screen 4 Press the OK key The Default Screen
85. Windows Experience Index Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Appearance and Personalization Windows Update Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Checkforupdates View installed updates Ease of Access i Power Options Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons i Change when the computer sleeps p Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup 6 amp M Riti Acker Drive Enenmtinn 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel System and Security and Allow a program through Windows Firewall NOTE If the User Account Control dialog box appears click the Continue button Seed Windows Firewall Allowed Programs Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public C BranchCache Content Retrieval Uses HTTP oO o O BranchCache Hosted Cache Client Uses HTTPS o o jZ O BranchCache Hosted Cache Server Uses HTTPS a o O BranchCache Peer Discovery Uses WSD o l O Connect to a Network Projector Oo o Core Networking 2 le and Printer Sharing CTHomeGroup DisCSI Service o O Media Center Extenders o C Netlogon Service o _Allow another program __
86. and click Next 2 43 Preparation before Use Pe New Inbound Rule Wizard Action Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Action Profile Name Specify the action to be taken when a connection matches the conditions specified in the rule What action should be taken when a connection matches the specified conditions This includes connections that are protected with IPsec as well as those are not Allow the connection if it is secure This includes only connections that have been authenticated by using IPsec Connections pals SE IPsec properties and rules in the Connection Security node Block the connection Leam more about actions r l New Inbound Rule Wizard Profile Specify the profiles for which this rule applies Steps a faa ice When does this rule apply Protocol and Ports Action V Domain Profile Applies when a computer is connected to its corporate domain Name E Private Applies when a computer is connected to a private network location V Public Applies when a computer is connected to a public network location Leam more about profiles lt Back Net gt J Cancel E d r l 1 New Inbound Rule Wizard Name Steps Rule Type Protocol and Ports Action Profile Name Specify the name and description of this rule Name Scan to SMB Description optional
87. and select Image Compression and the Compression Level If user login administration is invalid go to Step 5 toet et me a ee eee General Color Management Settings About General Color Management Settings About Image Compression Color authentication Scanner address authentication Yes No Compression Level s Secure protocol settings SSL low High Ess Unit Image Compression Gray Black amp White Account ID Compression Level Account ID Inch Metric 3 U tow Metric Co cmos When the machine is connected with the network cable go to Step 4 4 Select the checkbox beside Authentication enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters and then click OK NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 5 Click Close The machine is registered to the PC 2 28 Preparation before Use Command Center RX If the machine is connected to the network you can configure various settings using Command Center RX This section explains how to access Command Center RX and how to change security settings and the host name For 2 details on Command Center RX refer to the Command Center RX User Guide NOTE To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages enter the User Name and Password and click Login Entering the predefined administrator password allows the u
88. are available Screen Job statuses to be displayed Print Job Copy Printer FAX reception Document Box E mail reception Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Send Job FAX transmission PC SMB FTP transmission E mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Store Job Printer Scheduled Job Print Job Status Screen Status pata OK Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Print Job Status 0m OOO8HEEIC opy FAX 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select Print Job Status 3 Press the OK key Print Job Status appears Press the A or V key to check the print queue 7 2 Status Job Cancel Press the OK key to check detailed information of the 0009 Detail lt 0 selected job Status 1 8 Processing NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the menu that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy number of pages and copies to be printed Original Page number of pages of the original 7 Sender Info When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in
89. are shown below a a ee fH Top Edge Top Select the original s top edge at the top iz Top Edge Left Select the original s top edge at the left Refer to page 4 6 for Original Orientation Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings gt m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 51 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Orig Orientation 6 Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears Orig Orientation gt Edge Top 7 Press the A or V key to select 8 Top Edge Top or 4 Top Edge Left 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Backgrnd Copy Select the Backgrnd Copy default The available default settings are shown below Off Do not adjust background density Auto Set to auto adjustment Manual Darker 5 Set to Darker 5 in manual adjustment Use the pr
90. cause jams NOTE If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray For selecting labels use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure When printing onto labels you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used This composition of labels I achesive layer may cause more problems Carrier sheet The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels resulting in a serious failure Top sheet Appendix 16 Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet When using such paper do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output Allowed Not allowed lt Top sheet Carrier sheet Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications Item Specifications Top sheet w
91. document processor for the following types of originals Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried Irregularly shaped non rectangular originals Originals with cut out sections Crumpled paper Originals with folds Straighten the folds before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam Originals bound with clips or staples Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls wrinkles or creases before loading Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam How to Load Originals IMPORTANT Before loading originals be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam 1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals 2 60 Preparation before Use 2 Place the originals Put the side to be scanned or the first side of two sided originals face up Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will IMPORTANT Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals If there is a gap readjust the original width guides The gap may cause the originals to jam Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam
92. e Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory 6 2 e Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 6 5 e Removing USB Memory c cccsecceccccuceen edness 6 7 6 1 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer Limitations The following file types can be printed e PDF file Version 1 7 TIFF file TIFF V6 TTN2 format e JPEG file XPS file The files you wish to print should have an extension pdf tif jpg xps Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot If connected via a USB hub the machine may not operate correctly Printing Print documents stored in the removable USB memory 1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot 2 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Document Box bmg OK Sub Address Box Polling Box USB Memor 4 Press the OK key USB Memory appears USB Memory pata OK Store File Folder 1 PAFile 1 o Menu Select 5 Press the A or V key to select the the file you want to print 6 2 Document Box Select a folder and press the OK key to view the files in the folder Docume
93. ema Printer oar a Type Find Where Print to file Comment E Manual duplex Page range Copies All Number of copies fy 5 Current page Selection Pages a E Collate Enter page numbers and or page r 2 B Zoom Print what Document X li Pages per sheet page Print All pages in range z aaa Z Scale to paper size No Scaling p A 2 es Print size Collate a fai 7 74 o Orientation g Duplex TWh a Copies 1 kia EcoPrint E EcoPrint Re 8 Detail Portrait E On off off g on Auti lection 1 Pax S Off Print preview Save As Profiles CR KYOCERA cance Create a document using an application Click File and select Print in the application The Print dialog box appears Click the button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box Enter any number up to 999 When there is more than one document select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers Click Properties button The Properties dialog box appears Select the Basic tab and click the Print Size V button to select the paper size to use for printing from the list To print on the special paper such as thi
94. free from defects in material and workmanship Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions The parties agree that all other warranties expressed or implied including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability are excluded Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts upon their return to Monotype Imaging In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits lost data or any other incidental or consequential damages or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces Massachusetts U S A law governs this Agreement You shall not sublicense sell lease or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not cont
95. from Monotype Imaging Monotype Imaging retains all rights title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces except that you may make one backup copy You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces unless sooner terminated This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty 30 days after notice from Monotype Imaging When this License expires or is terminated you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested You agree that you will not modify alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging published specifications and the diskette will be
96. input units 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Measurement 4 Press the OK key The Measurement menu appears Measurement pata OK inch 5 Press the A or V key to select inch or mm 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 24 Default Setting System Menu Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type Description 1 sided Printed in 1 sided Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Paper Mismatch Error Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper type set in the paper source when printing from your computer Description Ignore Printing continues Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling 1 Inthe Sys Menu Cou
97. installed set the allocation of memory The procedure for setting the Optional Memory is explained below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings m appears Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Optional Memory 4 Press the OK key Optional Memory appears Optional Memory 0 Normal Printer Priority Copy Priority 5 Press the A or V key to select Normal Printer Priority or Copy Priority 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 75 Default Setting System Menu Disp Status Log Select the method of displaying the status log Setting items and selections are as follows JobsDetailStatus Select the method of displaying the jobs detail status screen Item Description Show All All users can view the jobs detail status My Jobs Only Only the jobs detail status of the job of the logged in user can be viewed Hide All Only users with administrator privileges can view the jobs detail status Jobs Log Select the method of displaying the Jobs Log Item Description Show All All users can view the job log My Jobs Only Only the jobs log of the job of the logg
98. is On For details refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Refer to Command Center RX on 2 29 for details on entering characters 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 59 3 Press the A or V key to select Folder SMB or Send to lt m Folder FTP ME mail IfeF older SMB IBF older FTP f 4 Press the OK key Host Name SMB or Host Name FTP Host Name SMB 0 appears RD Centeri 5 Enter the host name ABC Text NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying or Destination on page 3 25 Host Name FTP 0 RD Centeri ABC Text 6 Press the OK key Path appears 3 21 Basic Operation Path 0 RD3 reporti Text Login User Name Mauryl ABC Text Login Password 0 LETTETTTTET ABC Text Check the connection Are you sure Yes I No 7 Enter the path name Consider that the share name but not the folder name on the destination PC has to be typed in 8 Press the OK key Login User Name appears 9 Enter the login user name You have to enter the account name of the destination PC 10 Press the OK key Login Password app
99. is automatically selected can be limited by media types If Plain is selected the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected Select All Media Types for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit gi 3 Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m lol Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Media for Auto 6 Press the OK key Media for Auto appears Media for Auto pata OK All Media Type Transparency 7 Press the A or V key to select All Media Type or the paper type to be used for paper selection 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 19 Default Setting System Menu Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1 4 and Multi Purpose Tray NOTE Cassette 2 and Cassette 3 are displayed
100. is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu 7 18 Status Job Cancel Pause and Resumption of Jobs Pause resume all printing jobs in printing waiting The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status lt 0 appears Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Pressthe A or V key to select Print Job Status 3 Press the OK key Print Job Status appears Print Job Status 0 0009 Gmaury s data 0010 Daaaa Pause Menu e er 4 Press Pause the Left Select key Printing is paused Pausing Sma ok 0009 amp maury s data Il 0010 Daaaa Il Resume Menu When you press Resume the Left Select key to resume printing m NOTE When you press the Back key a confirmation Resume paused jobs screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to resume Are you sure printing Yes I No Canceling of Jobs For canceling jobs refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3 28 7 19 Status Job Cancel Device Communication Configure the devices lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status You can also control devices depending on their status Check of Device Status 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status lt 0 appears Store Job Log Printer Pause 2 Pressthe A or V key to select Sca
101. is temporarily canceled Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears qe Common Settings lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key f A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and T ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login m 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting gt 0m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit Press the A or V key to select Unusable Time Press the OK key Unusable Time appears Unusable Time O On Exit 8 43 Default Setting System Menu 7 Press the A or V key to select On 8 Press the OK key Start Time appears Start Time Kad OK Hour Min MY oo Current Time 11 45 9 Press the A or V key to set the Start Time 10 Press the OK key End Time appears End Time bmg OK Hour Min MYO oo Current Time 11 45 11 Press the A or V key to set the End Time 12 Press the OK key Unlock Code appears Unlock Code pai OK 0000
102. key to select Document Box Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Press the A or V key to select Job Box Press the OK key The Job Box screen appears Press the A or V key to select JobRet Deletion Press the OK key The Job Retention Deletion screen appears Press the A or V key to select the period that jobs are retained Press the OK key The screen returns to the Job Box screen 8 108 Default Setting System Menu Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when printing from or saving to a document box You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document box Print None Collate e Paper Selection e Duplex e EcoPrint e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Print Override e Encrypted PDF e JPEG TIFF Print e XPS FitTo Page e Del afterPrint Store e None e Color Selection e Original Size e Original Image Scan Resolution Storing Size e Zoom e Orig Orientation e Continuous Scan e File Format e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Density e Duplex e Sharpness e Backgrnd Density 8 109 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set Sys Menu Count Send FAX Exit Document Box lt m Select Key Set Polling Box Exit
103. lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default i Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Con scan ExptFAX 6 Press the OK key Con scan ExptFAX appears Con scan ExptFAX gt lo OLE On 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 58 Default Setting System Menu File Format Select the default file type to send the scanned originals The available default settings are shown below PDF Send files in PDF format TIFF Send files in TIFF format XPS Send files in XPS format JPEG Send files in JPEG format NOTE Refer to page 5 9 for file formats Use the procedure below to select the default file format Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit File Format Sma OK o1 PDF TIFF XPS 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select
104. menu appears System Network I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu appears I F Block Set 0m USB Device USB Storage Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select USB Storage 8 175 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key USB Storage appears USB Storage gt oK o Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the I F Block Set menu Optional interface Optional interface card setting This locks and protects the optional interface slot The default setting is Unblock Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt M select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit f A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and MEE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login mN 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select I F Block Set Press the OK key The I F Block Set menu ap
105. off jobs stored in this mode are erased For the number of documents that can be stored in Quick Copy mode see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8 107 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu Document Box Sig OK appears Sub Address Box Polling Box Job Box Press the A or V key to select Job Box Press the OK key The Job Box menu appears Job Box Km OK Private Quick Copy 4 Press the A or V key to select Quick Copy Press the OK key The user selection menu appears Quick Copy lt 0 amp Maury 6 Press the A or V key to select the user 7 Press the OK key The print file selection menu appears amp Fiala Sma OK fAData02 o fAData03 o Menu Select 6 10 Document Box Menu ol Select All Clear All om Detail Fiala Sma OK Print Delete Copies oes OK 1 999 ics 8 Press the A or V key to select the file to be printed and then press Select the Right Select key The selected file will be marked If you need to add another file repeat this procedure to select the file NOTE To select all files press Menu the Left Select key and select Select All To deselect all files select Clear All To show file details select Detail 9 Press the OK key The file print and delete selection menu appears 10 Press the A or V key to select Print and
106. or Host Name FTP m Last rae eae oles H Address i ook or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying RD n Centeri Destination on page 3 25 ABC Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets Text 4 Press the OK key Path appears Path Sa OK RD3 reporti Text 5 Enter the path name 8 125 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name gt Mauryl A Text Login Password eecceeceesall Text Check the connection Are you sure Yes No Dest Confirm lt gt m MMorganQ HHH EEHEEHE 40667741234 Exit 6 Press the OK key Login User Name appears 7 Enter the login user name 8 Press the OK key Login Password appears 9 Enter the login password 10 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination page 8 107 is set to On screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens 11 Press Yes the Left Select key This makes a connection with the entered destination If the connection is successful Connected is displayed on the screen Press OK the Right Select key Completed is displayed and the folder SMB FTP address is registered If the connection failed Cannot connect is dis
107. press Change the Right Select key select the user access privilege and then press the OK key NOTE If the user list is for device administrator Change is not displayed 16 Press the gt key to select Account Name press Change the Right Select key select the account and then press the OK key NOTE If the user list is for device administrator and the device administrator does not log in Change is not displayed 17 After entering the user information press the OK key again Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Local User List Management Changing User Properties User information can be changed It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges Use the procedure below to change the user properties NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters System Menu Counter Sys Menu Count 0m 4 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login User Job Account 0m Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit User Login Set gt User Login Group Auth Exit 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator p
108. press the OK key NOTE To delete the selected file without printing it select Delete and press the OK key The file deletion confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Completed appears and the file is deleted 11 The number of copies screen appears Set the number of copies and press the OK key The number of copies specified in the print job is displayed in of Copies 12 The file print confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted appears and printing begins Document Box 6 12 This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and pause or resume the jobs Status Job Cancel being processed or waiting to be printed This chapter also explains how to check the status of devices Checking JOD SAMUS ci iiiciivicsinsdannisereoiecnaaneimminas 1 Checking Job History PAA EPE AE AE AS E ES 7 8 sending the Job Log HIStory siscririeniniieainiaiissan S Pause and Resumption of JODS ccccccseeesteeeees 7 19 Canceling of JODS k 10 Device Communication 22i cceecteeececceciee 7 20 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed Available Status Screens The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different screens Print Job Send Job Store Job and Scheduled Job The following job statuses
109. procedure below to select the original size 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Statement 4 Function Menu pata OK Collate Oo Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Original Size Press the OK key Original Size appears Original Size pata OK Legal 4 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 7 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 2 Copying Functions Paper Selection Select the paper source that contains the required paper size NOTE Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette refer to Original Paper Settings on page 8 7 Selecting the Cassette Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette Function Menu Sma OK Collate Duplex Exit oO oO lj Lett Paper Selection foy Auto ter Plain Cust tom Plain om 1 2 Press the Copy key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Press the A or V key to select the desired paper
110. procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit _ 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set es 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Orig Paper Set m Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Set Cassette 2 Set or Cassette 3 Set Follow the steps below when you select the main unit cassette Cassette 1 Operate in a similar fashion when you select an optional cassette Cassette 2 or 3 8 12 Default Setting System Menu Cassette 1 Set 0m ol Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type Exit Cassette 1 Size m lo A4 a5 Dp ach Cassette 1 Set 0m ol Cassette 1 Size Cassette 1 Type Exit Cassette 1 Type gt m Rough Recycled 6 The Cassette 1 Set menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Size 8 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Size appears 9 Press the A or V key to select the paper size 10 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set me
111. program page 5 25 NOTE Different sending options can be specified in combination Refer to Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending on page 3 27 3 18 Basic Operation Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment NOTE You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server It is recommended 3 that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN Access the Command Center RX beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e mail For details refer to the Command Center RX on page 2 29 Refer to Command Center RX on 2 29 for details on entering characters 1 Press the Send key Displays the screen for sending 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor Fl A FER EL Sii NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 59 3 Press the A or V key to select E mail Send to Sma OK 01 ME mail IBF older SMB IBF older FTP 4 Press the OK key Address Entry appears Address Entry 0 Text 5 Enter the destination e mail address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 25 3 19 Basic Operation 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed an
112. see the figure Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last not first 2 61 Preparation before Use 2 62 3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the following operations lt LOON bOO ca 3 2 e One Touch Keys and Program KeyS sce 3 3 Message Bp ay re ere es 3 6 SOONG ENE A A E O O E N A A E T e Printing Printing from Applications 3 16 e Sending PEELA AATE IEE EE T TEE TAR 3 18 Specifying D Destinaticn EREN EE TE EE ET 3 25 GancehngJODScuninprnninni ddh 3 28 e Checking Remaining 1 Tast ahd Papii SE 3 29 3 1 Basic Operation Login Logout If user login administration is enabled it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine NOTE You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password In this event log in with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password Login NOTE Refer to Command Center RX on 2 29 for details on entering characters 1 Ifthe screen shown appears during operations enter the Login User Name 0 login user name Login Password Login 2 Press the V key The input cursor moves to Login Password 3 Enter the login password Press the A key to move the input cursor to Login User Name 4 Check the login user name a
113. select Each Page and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 22 Sending Functions Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patterns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur The setting items are as follows _ o e 1 to 3 Sharpen Emphasizes the image outline 1 to 3 Unsharpen Blurs the image outline Can weaken a Moire effect Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots The procedure for adjusting the sharpness of copies is explained below 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK 0 Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Sharpness 5 Press the OK key Sharpness appears Sharpnes
114. the OK key Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Place paper in the multi purpose tray Press the Start key to start copying If Add paper in MP tray is displayed during the copying process add paper in the multi purpose tray and then press the OK key Copying then resumes NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 5 Copying Functions Original Orientation Select the original orientation to use the following functions e Duplex Combine mode When placing originals on the platen Top Edge Top Top Edge Left When placing originals on the document processor Top Edge Top Top Edge Left NOTE To change the default setting for the original orientation refer to Function Defaults on page 8 45 4 6 Copying Functions Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen Function Menu paid OK Collate O Duplex O Exit Orig Orientation gt Edge Top Edge Left 1 2 Press the Copy key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Pr
115. the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 8 Sending Functions File Format Select the file format of the image to send The table below lists the file formats and their details File Format Adjustable oe orimage Color mode quality PDF 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black High Quality Low Comp and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White TIFF 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black High Quality Low Comp and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White XPS 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 Auto Color Color Grayscale Auto Color Color Black High Quality Low Comp and White Full Color Grayscale Black and White JPEG 1 Low Quality High Comp to 5 Auto Color Color Grayscale Full Color Grayscale High Quality Low Comp i The file format can be set to PDF A 1a or PDF A 1b Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission 1 2 3 Function Menu Kad OK Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 5 File Format Kma OK o PDF TIFF XPS Detail 6 7 8 Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select File Format Press the OK key File Format appear
116. the authentication server and press the OK key If Ext is selected for the server type enter the host name up to 64 characters and port number of the authentication server and press the OK key NOTE If the login user name and password are rejected check the following settings e Network Authentication setting of the machine User property of the Authentication Server e Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings If the server type is Kerberos only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Login Set menu Management Login Logout Once you enable user login administration a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine Login Log in using the procedure below NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Login User Name Login Password Login Logout Logout 1 If the screen below appears during the operations perform the following login operations 2 Press the OK key enter the login user name and then press the OK key 3 Press the V key to select Login Password press the OK key enter the login password and then press the OK
117. the network settings have been changed restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective For details refer to Restart Network on page 8 170 2 15 Preparation before Use Installing Software Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD Product Library if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC Software on DVD Windows You can use either Express Install or Custom Install can be selected for the installation method Express Install is the standard installation method To install components that cannot be installed by Express Install use Custom Install For details refer to Custom Install in the Installing Printer Driver in Windows on page 2 17 Installation method e Standard installation o Allows selection of Software Description the components to be installed Express Custom Install Install KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine Multiple page description languages PCL XL KPDL etc are supported by a single driver This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the machine Use this driver to print PDF files KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS XML Paper Specification format developed by Microsoft Corporation KPDL mini driver This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supp
118. the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key f A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and Pt TTT ttt press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 32 Default Setting System Menu 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting lt m ol Auto Panel Reset PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto Err Clear 6 Press the OK key Auto Err Clear appears Auto Err Clear lo Oft On 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu GE e Error Clear Timer If you select On for Auto Error Clear set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds The default setting is 30 seconds If you set 0 as the time errors are not displ
119. then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 5 Sending Functions Duplex Sending Select the type and binding of original depending on the original The table below lists the binding directions for each original type Original 1 sided Sheet Original 1 sided Binding Binding 2 sided Sheet Original 2 sided Binding Left Right Top Edge Top Binding Top Top Edge Left Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals 2 sided Function Menu pata OK Original Size O Original Image O Exit Duplex pata OK o 1 sided 1 2 Press the Send key Place the originals on the document processor Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Duplex Press the OK key Duplex appears Press the A or V key to select 1 sided or 2 sided If you select 2 sided press Detail the Right Select key select the binding edge and press the OK key and then select the original setting orientation on the next screen Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination
120. to the descriptions below for how to enter each item 8 128 Default Setting System Menu Entering Group Name 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Group Name Detail lt Group Name 1 4 Sales Section Edit 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Group Name 0 appears Salesi ABC Text 3 Enter the group name If creating a new group name the address number allocated to the destination is already entered 4 Press the OK key The group name is registered qe Entering Group Member 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Group Member Detail lt 0 Group Member 2 3 30 Edit x 2 Press Edit the Right Select key This displays the list Group Member gt 0 of destinations registered to the group EMorgan Morgan Menu 7 3 Press Menu the Right Select key The group editing Menu lt menu appears Delete Add Member 4 Press the A or V key to select Add Member 8 129 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the OK key This displays the list of destinations Contacts OK registered in the Address Book amp Maury NOTE If 100 members have already been registered in the amp Morgan group the screen will display Registered numbers Menu exceeded and return to the Group Member 6 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to add to the group
121. total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Other used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes Only on products with the FAX function installed Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 11 29 Management Sys Menu Count 0m User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters User Job Account gt User Login Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set m Job Accounting AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Default Setting gt Copy Print Count Apply Limit Exit Counter Limit lt m Print Restrict ScanRest Other 10 The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set Press the OK key The Job Account S
122. user name for logging onto Windows 1 From the Start menu select All Programs or Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt In Windows 8 display Apps on Search in charms on the Start screen and select Command Prompt The Command Prompt window appears 2 37 Preparation before Use HEH Command Prompt ma 2 Atthe Command Prompt enter net config workstation and then click Enter Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76081 Copyright lt c 69 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved iC Users james smith gt net config workstation Computer nane PC4058 Full Computer nane T Screen example user name james smith and domain name ABCDNET Morkstation active on NetBT_Tcpip_ XXKXXKXK XKXK XKXK XKXK XKXKXXKXXXXK C KXXXKXXKXKXX Software version Windows 7 Ultimate Workstation domain ABCDNET Logon domain ABCDNET ICOM Open Timeout lt sec gt ICOM Send Count lt hyte gt ICOM Send Timeout lt msec gt The command completed successfully iC Users james smith gt Creating a Shared Folder Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows NOTE If there is a workgroup in System Properties configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group 1 From the Start menu select Control Panel Appearance and Personalization and then Folder Options Ease of Access Center l Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High
123. when the optional paper feeder installed Use the procedure below to select the default paper source Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se ttings gt m 01 Language Defau Sound 1 t Screen Exit Def Orig Paper Set m lol Custom Orig Size Orig Custom PaperSize Exit Size Casse Casse Def PaperSurce m loll Cassette 1 te 2 te 3 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Def PaperSource Press the OK key Def PaperSource appears 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper source to be used preferentially 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 20 Default Setting System Menu Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead punch holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions In such a case select Adj PrintDirect to adjust the print direction When paper orientation is not important sel
124. 10 Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting 11 Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting menu appears qe 12 Press the A or V key to select DHCP 13 Press the OK key DHCP appears 14 Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 143 Default Setting System Menu Auto IP Settings Select whether or not to use Auto IP The default setting is On Use the procedure below to specify the Auto IP setting Sys Menu Count lt Report Counter System Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt WSD SCAN WSD PRINT TCP IP Settings lt m IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears Press the A or
125. 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 200 x 100 dpi File Format JPEG TIFF PDF XPS PDF A Scanning Speed 1 1 sided B W 35 Images min Color 14 Images min 2 sided B W 18 Images min Color 8 Images min A4 landscape 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Interface Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T USB2 0 Hi Speed USB Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission System PC transmission SMB Scan to PC FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail Scan to USB TWAIN scan 1 WIA scan 2 4 Available Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 2 Available Operating System Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 Appendix 21 Document Processor Item Description Original Feed Automatic feed Method Supported Original Sheet originals Types Paper Size Maximum Legal A4 Minimum Statement A5 Paper Weight Simplex 50 to 120 g m Duplex 50 to 110 g m Loading Capacity 50 sheets 50 to 80 g m maximum Environmental Specifications Item Description Time to Low Power mode 1 minute default setting Recovery time from Low Power mode 1 second or less Time to Sleep mode default setting 1 minute Recovery time from Sleep mode 15
126. 7 Press the OK key This displays the sending address amp Sally gt m registered to the selected destination 410667643277 Msally t tttttt ttt IBNtid7004 Menu Press the A or V key to select the sending address Press the OK key The selected destination is added to the group and the screen returns to Group Member NOTE If you select an individual destination that has already been registered to the group the screen will display This address is already registered and return to the screen of step 7 Deleting member from group To delete a member registered to the group follow the procedure below 1 While Group Member is displayed press Edit the Group Member lt OK Right Select key This displays the list of destinations registered to the group EMorgan Morgan Menu 2 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to delete 3 Press Menu the Right Select key The group editing Menu lt menu appears Detail Delete Add Member 4 Press the A or V key to select Delete 8 130 Default Setting System Menu Delete Are you sure Msally Yes No Entering Address Number 5 Press the OK key A confirmation message appears 6 Press Yes the Left Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to Group Member Address Number is an ID for a destination When creating a new destination the sma
127. 8 27 e Date Format 8 29 e Time Zone 8 30 Summer Time 8 31 Auto Error Clear 8 32 e Low Power Timer 8 35 e Sleep Rules models for Europe 8 36 e Sleep Level models except for Europe 8 37 e Sleep Timer 8 39 e Auto Panel Reset 8 40 e Unusable Time 8 43 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Gq Date Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine If you perform Send as E mail the date and time set here will be displayed on the header CAUTION Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date Time setup Use the procedure below to set the date and time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 8 27 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J Date Setting lt m Date Format Time Zone Exit Date Time gt V 0 Year Month Day 2011 01 01 Time Zone Greenwich Date Time lt m Hour Min Second 45 50 Time Zone Greenwich 10 Press the A or V key to se
128. AX Resolution Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 8 64 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting m 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select 4 in 1 Layout 8 Press the OK key 4 in 1 Layout appears 4 in 1 Layout Sma OK fol 4 Right then Down T Down then Right Left then Down 9 Press the A or V key to select 4 Right then Down T4 Down then Right Left then Down or Down then Left 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the qe screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Border Line Select the default value for border line when 2 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are as follows Item Description None No border line Solid Line Draws solid border lines Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Co
129. Alert Level Set the amount of remaining toner to alert low toner The procedure for setting the TonerAlert Level is explained below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings m appears Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select TonerAlert Level 4 Press the OK key TonerAlert Level appears TonerAlert Level 0m off On 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 If On is selected and the OK key is pressed the Toner Toner Level a Level screen appears 5 100 ES If Off is selected and the OK key is pressed proceed to step 8 7 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to set the level at which an alert will be displayed 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 78 Default Setting System Menu Copy Settings The following settings are available for copying functions e Paper Selection 8 79 e Auto Paper Selection 8 80 e Auto Priority 8 81 Select Key Set 8 82 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Paper Selection Set the default paper selection T
130. Auto 8 84 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the emulation N 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count M select Printer Common Settings CoPy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt gt m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Emulation Set 4 Press the OK key Emulation Set appears Emulation Set lt M PCL6 KP DL fo7 KPDL Auto 5 Press the A or V key to select the printer you want to emulate 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu NOTE If you select KPDL or KPDL Auto the operation after selecting the emulation is different from others If you select KPDL refer to page 8 86 If you select KPDL Auto refer to page 8 86 8 85 Default Setting System Menu When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation When you use the KPDL emulation mode set whether or not to output KPDL error reports The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 In Emulation Set press the A or V key to select KPDL Emulation Set m PCL6 KPDL Auto 2 Press the OK key KPDL Error Rpt appears KPDL Error Rpt gt 0m o OfF On Press the A or V key to select Off or On 4 Press the OK key Complete
131. Border Line Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Gq Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select 2 in 1 Layout 8 63 Default Setting System Menu 4in 1 Layout 2 in 1 Layout Kma oK L R to L n 0 1 ee to R EH T to B El 8 Press the OK key 2 in 1 Layout appears 9 Press the A or V key to select H L to R J T to B or EI R to L 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Select the default value for layout when 4 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are as Item Description 3 Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right follows t4 Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom Left then Down Arranges from upper right to left I Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution F
132. CP IP Setting WSD SCAN WSD PRINT 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears TCP IP Settings IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Protocol Detail 8 152 Default Setting System Menu Protocol Detail gt 01 NetBEUI SNMP v3 FTP Server FTP Client 0m Ort Port Number 0 1 65535 10 11 12 Press the OK key The Protocol Detail menu appears Press the A or V key to select the item for which you want to make settings Press the OK key This displays the setting screen for the item selected in step 9 The screen shown is the one when FTP Client is selected Press the A or V key to select On or Off If you select On for each of FTP Client and IPP and GE press the OK key a port number entry screen appears Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to set the port number Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu 8 153 Default Setting System Menu Network Security The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data The following network security settings are available e IPSec Setting 8 154 e SSL Setting 8 155 e SNMPVv3 Setting 8 163 IPSec Setting
133. Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu Original Paper Settings Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently used custom original size The dimensions available are as follows 8 7 Default Setting System Menu The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Input units Dimensions Inch models 1 97 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments 1 97 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models x Y x Y Use the procedure below to set a custom original size Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set gt 01 Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Size Entry Y oe OK 1 97 8 50 Size Entry X cat OK 1 97 14 02 ea 50 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments 50 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Custom Orig Size Press the OK key Size Entry Y appears Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length Y Press the
134. Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination Place the original and press the Start key Place the next original and press the Start key Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure When you have scanned all the originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 14 Sending Functions File Name Entry This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images You can specify a default for the document name Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending Function Menu pata OK Original Size O Original Image m Exit File Name Entry 0 dock Text 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry 5 Press the OK key File Name Entry appears NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 6 Enter the file name press the OK key Additional Info appears NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 7 Enter the date and time job number etc on the screen and then press the OK key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on
135. DAP 8 152 LPD 8 151 NetBEUI 8 151 POP3 E mail RX 8 151 Raw Port 8 151 SMTP E mail TX 8 151 SNMP 8 151 TCP IP IPv4 8 137 TCP IP IPv6 8 146 8 149 8 150 NW InterfaceSend 8 172 O Open SSLeay xxiii Operation Panel 1 2 Option Expansion Memory Appendix 2 Network Interface Kit Appendix 4 Overview Appendix 2 Paper Feeder Appendix 2 Wireless Network Interface Kit Appendix 4 Optional Functions 8 177 Optional Memory 8 75 Optional Network 8 164 Bonjour Settings 8 166 IPSec 8 167 LAN Interface 8 169 Restart Network 8 170 TCP IP Settings 8 164 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2 60 Placing on the Platen 2 59 Original eject table 1 6 Original Orientation Copy 4 6 Document Processor 4 6 Send 5 7 Original Size Selection Index 3 Index Send 5 2 Original SSLeay License xxiv Original stopper 1 6 Original table 1 6 Original width guides 1 6 Originals Copy 4 2 Custom 8 7 Setup 8 7 Size Selection 4 2 5 2 p Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix 12 Auto Selection 8 19 Before Loading 2 46 Cassette 8 12 Custom 8 10 Default Paper Source 8 20 Loading in the Cassettes 2 47 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2 50 Multi Purpose Tray 8 14 Setup 8 7 Size and Media 2 54 Appendix 9 Special Paper 8 21 Appendix 14 Specifications Appendix 11 Weight 8 16 Paper Feeder Appendix 2 Paper Jam 10 13 Cassette 1 10 14 Document Processor 10 17 Duplexer 10 15 Jam Location Indicators 10 13 MP Tray 10 14
136. DAP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server The default setting is Off NOTE LDAP must be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 151 The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server SSL TLS Encryption is applied any data communication To enable LDAP security the LDAP port may have to be changed according to the server settings Typically 636 for SSL TLS is well known LDAP port STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication Typically 389 for STARTTLS is well known LDAP port You can change the port number using Command Center RX GE Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password with administrator privileges to log in and EER E press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login J 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting lt Host Name LAN Interface
137. Density Exit Press the A or V key to select Send Box Density Press the OK key Send Box Density appears 7 5 Press the A or V key to select the density from 3 Send Box Density 0 Lighter to 3 Darker 1 4 0 Normal 1 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust Maint menu Backgrnd Density Darkens or lightens the overall background density Copy mode and send document box mode can each be adjusted to one of seven levels Use the procedure below to specify the setting for Background Density mN 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Adjust Maint Document Box Edit Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint gt Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Backgrnd Density Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Backgrnd Density 8 117 Default Setting System Menu Send Backgrnd Density gt lol Copy Auto Box Auto Exit Copy Auto 1 1 om Print Density Adjust Print Density Use the procedure below to adjust the Print Density sys Menu Coun Document Box O Edit 2 Adjust Maint Destin t gt ation Exit Adjust Maint 01 Cop Send Box De Backgrnd De Denst
138. Density 8 118 e Correct Bk Line 8 119 e New Developer 8 120 e DP Adjustment 8 121 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Copy Denst Adj Adjust copy density Adjustment can be made in 7 levels Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density Sys Menu Count Document Box 4 Edit Destination Exit Adjust Maint gt Send Box Density Backgrnd Density Exit Copy Denst Adj gt 1 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Adjust Maint Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Press the A or V key to select Copy Denst Adj Press the OK key Copy Denst Adj appears Press the A or V key to select the density from 3 Lighter to 3 Darker Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust Maint menu 8 116 Default Setting System Menu Send Box Density Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box Adjustment can be made in 7 levels 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 4 Edit Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Adjust Maint lt Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Backgrnd
139. Displays the destination 3 6 Basic Operation Copying Follow the steps as below for basic copying Fl J SS aan J Ready to copy Copies 1 Letter g FlayLetter H 100 Zoom Paper Paper source Paper Selection Wm a4 Plain 2 A5 D Plain 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off NOTE If the Message Display is turned off press the any 3 key on the operation panel and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the originals on the platen or in the document processor NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 59 3 The paper source for copying is the location displayed on the panel When you need to change the paper source use the Paper Selection menu If Auto is selected the most suitable paper source is automatically selected For specifying the paper source refer to Paper Selection on page 4 3 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity Specify the desired number up to 999 5 Press the Start key to start copying 3 7 Basic Operation Adjusting Density Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying 6 Remove the finished copies from the inner tray The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below Function Menu Sai OK Collate O Duplex O Exit Density Sma OK OVE Lighter
140. E Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking what to enter for Host Name Check the name of the destination computer Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name PC4050 Full computer name PC4050 Computer description Workgroup abcdnet Windows activation Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name PC4050 Full computer name PC4050 gbcdnet com Computer description Domain abcdnet Windows activation Checking what to enter for Login User Name From the Start menu select Computer and then System Properties Check the computer name in the window that appears In Windows XP right click My Computer and select Properties The System Properties dialog box appears Click the Computer Name tab in the window that appears and check the computer name In Windows 8 select the desktop in the Start screen right click Computer from Libraries and then select Properties If there is a workgroup All characters appearing in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example PC4050 If there is a domain The characters to the left of the first dot in Full computer name should be entered in Host Name Example pc4050 After checking the computer name click the m Close button to close the System Properties screen In Windows XP after checking the computer name click the Cancel button to close the System Properties screen Check the domain name and
141. ENDRE ESATE ESEESE EIEE ETE 4 19 5 Sending Functions Original SIZ eresas ererek E R eee eee ped aE E dea heathens 5 2 Contents 10 SNMG SIZC ania ao eae ded ave ctonen tee ev dea stake Wate tied A Sea tat aeate deh gegen ana tla O ae wae beet 5 3 ZOOM iia reidas EN E bint Ghee a a a bebevedi PRANA SA das Gilat 5 5 Duplex Sending raserer u esata cite daa ce dc Weta ee Wing eM red no Aces Sere ag a naa ns Se aaa dele Oa 5 6 Original Orientation nce ones BAT Pada EN a ee ee Pe E 5 7 FIEFIA ereraa ture es ar EN E coe has E EE EE E E E ay Naa cece saueecnae NE 5 9 Original Mage eireta a R T A T E E E E E Mand eta Shawl 5 10 Adjusting Density 0 0 0 DEEE EE E 5 11 Scan ReSOMUON ersari ei 2 eae daw et eae Pea ee ease eda pees El eas eee es 5 12 Color Selection se c koe a eh eee Dh ok Be te ee Sa a ae eh ae 5 13 Continous SCAM i e e da hen ae aa a Sande Shae ew ee a a a E E 5 14 File Name Entry 000 EEEE Ea EEEE E y EEA E RETAN eee 5 15 Subject and Body EMY corres cisa d renne a eee 5 16 WV CAN ea a E EEE y E Nee E i E a RE desist 5 17 Job Finish Notice 222 2 22 6 fea ec ta iiris dtan ea ee eae ae ee ae eaves 5 19 FIP Enciyplod TA erases dekh a ene ed 2 ere Dg naa a Fada 5 21 File Separation 0046 40 roa sa dada eee bad pee ba sd pee ae p Se A aS 2 5 22 SMANPMESS ate piece A pa entra nee aca ae ee fae ane pp dete Sea eee Ree a 5 23 Backgmd Density co dicc2ei45 peritis Qadiani de diesda dia 458 Gas Sadana 5 24 S
142. Echsrs gt PRINT gt COPY gt SCAN ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn gt PRINT gt COPY gt SCAN gt FAX ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn OPERATION GUIDE ry KYOCERA Document Solutions Introduction Thank you for your purchase of ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary so that you can always use the machine in good condition Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine and keep it close to the machine for easy reference We recommend the use of our own brand supplies We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand NSULCNG EEY T W KYOCERA 7 W KYOCE This Operation Guide also includes instructions on ECOSYS M2030dn PN In this Operation Guide ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn are referred to as 30 ppm model and ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn are referred to as 35 ppm model The 30 ppm model may not be available in some regions Included Guides The following guides are supplied with the machine Refer to them as necessary Quick Installation Guide Describes frequently used operations convenient operations routine maintenance and troubleshooting action Safety Guide Pr
143. Einish 7 Finish the installation When Your software is ready to use appears you can use the software To print a test page click the Print a test page checkbox and select the machine Click Finish to exit the wizard NOTE When you have selected Device settings in Windows XP the dialog box for device setting will appear after Finish is clicked Configure the settings for options installed on the machine Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed For details refer to the Device Settings in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD Ifa system restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the printer driver installation procedure The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network If you are installing the TWAIN driver continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on 2 26 Custom Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using Custom Install f Notice By using or installing the device drivers and software included in this package you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this license agreement View License Agreement Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 1 Insert the DVD NOTE e Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with ad
144. Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default i 01I Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry 6 Press the OK key File Name Entry appears Enter the File name Entry document name up to 32 characters doc if A ABC Text 7 Press the OK key Additional Info appears Additional Info 0 Job No 0a Job No Date Date Job No 8 Press the A or V key to select None Date JobNo JobNo Date or Date JobNo 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 56 Default Setting System Menu Subject Body Set the subject and body automatically entered default subject and body when sending the scanned originals by E mail Refer to Send as E mail on page 3 19 Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se Defaul Sound ttings lol Language t Screen om Exit Function De fault gt m Color e election Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Subject Entry 0
145. Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select File Format Press the OK key File Format appears 7 Press the A or V key to select PDF TIFF XPS or JPEG 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 59 Default Setting System Menu File Separation Select the default file separation setting The available default settings are shown below Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se ttings gt m Language Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Color election Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit File Separation m ol OfEt Each Page 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select File Separation 6 Press the OK key File Separation appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or Each Page 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 60 Default Setting System Menu JPEG TIFF Print Select the JPEG TIFF Print default
146. Functions WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD compatible computer NOTE For information on operating the computer refer to the operating system help for your computer To use WSD Scan WSD Scan Setup page 8 149 must be set to On in the network settings Installing Driver Software to the destination machine The example shows you how to install the driver software to a Windows Vista PC 1 Click Start and then Network in the computer 2 Right click the machine s icon and then click Install NOTE If the User Account Control window appears click Continue If the Found New Hardware window appears click Cancel 3 During the installation double click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software Installation screen When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software Installation screen the installation is completed Procedure using this machine 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Displays the screen for sending NOTE Depending on the settings the address book screen may appear In this event press Cancel to display the screen for sending 3 Press the A or V key to select WSD Scan Send to Sma OK IBF older SMB IBF older FTP WSD Scan 4 Press the OK key WSD Scan appears WSD Scan Sma OK From Computer From Oper Pa
147. Hi Speed USB compliant Max 5 0 m Shielded Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed For details on Network FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide 2 4 Preparation before Use Connect the machine to the PC or your network device C2 When using the network interface remove the cap Connecting Cables Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine 1 When connecting the network cable configure the network For details refer to Network Setup LAN Cable Connection on page 2 14 ANY N AASS W Wy 2 Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet Wy WY WN IMPORTANT Only use the power cable that comes with the machine 2 5 Preparation before Use Power On Off Power On Press the Power switch IMPORTANT When turning off the power switch do not turn on the power switch again immediately Wait more than 5 seconds and then turn on the power switch Power Off Make sure that the memory indicator is off then press the Power switch Make sure that the indicator is off 2 6 Preparation before Use Energy Saver Function Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The message display backlight turn off to reduce the power consumption This status is re
148. IPP The default setting is PP IPP over SSL Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and EEEE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 156 Default Setting System Menu HTTP Security System Network lt lol Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt Host Name LAN Interface Exit Secure Protocol lt SSL IPP Security HTTP Security Exit IPP Security lt m PP IPP over SSL 0J IPPoverSSL onl 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears 7 Press the A or V key to select IPP Security 8 Press the OK key IPP Security appears 9 Press the A or V key to select IPP IPP over SSL or IPPoverSSL only 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu Specify th
149. Internal condensation has occurred as a result of a sudden change in temperature Turn off the machine and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes and then back on again If this message still remains turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner The job is canceled Press the OK key Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded Press the OK key to print send or store the scanned pages Press the Stop key to cancel printing sending or storing Memory is full Job is canceled The job is canceled Press the OK key Memory is full Print job cannot be processed completely Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up Press the OK key to print the scanned pages The print job cannot be processed completely Press the Stop key to cancel the job Non genuine Toner Press Help This message is displayed if the installed toner container is non genuine The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for damage caused by a non genuine toner We recommend that you only use genuine toner containers When you want to use the toner container currently installed press the OK key and Stop key simultaneously for 3 seconds or more 10 8 Troubleshooting Error Message Paper jammed Check Points Corrective Actions If a paper jam occurs the machine will stop and the l
150. Job Name is displayed in a short form press Detail the Right Select key to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen Item Key Detail Acceptance No of job Icons that indicate the job type mCopy job mPrinter job 2 FAX reception E E mail reception BJob from Document Box Report List A EData from Removable Memory Job Name Job Name or file name Status Status of job Ee Printing I Print Waiting no icon Pausing print job or error Ei Preferential print job is running lg Suspended because preferential print job is running 7 3 Status Job Cancel Send Job Status screen Status Pause om Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status 1 2 3 4 0011 Detail ica OK Status 1 8 Processing Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Send Job Status Press the OK key Send Job Status appears Press the A or V key to check the send queue Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the men u that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed a
151. NetBEUI NetBIOS Extended User Interface An interface developed by IBM in 1985 as an update from NetBIOS It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP IP etc It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS 2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 A standard protocol to receive E mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems It enables flexible font functions and highly functional graphics allowing higher quality printing The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985 followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two byte languages e g Japanese in 1990 In 1996 Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies PPM prints per minute This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software The printer driver for the machine is contained in the DVD enclosed in the package Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine Send as E mail A function to send the image data stored in t
152. OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings gt m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default Gq 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting pata OK 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Color TIFF Comp 8 Press the OK key Color TIFF Comp appears Color TIFF Comp 0m O TIFF V6 TTN2 9 Press the A or V key to select TIFF V6 or TTN2 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 71 Default Setting System Menu PDF A Set the default settings for PDF A when PDF is selected for the file format Use the procedure below to set the default value for PDF A Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings gt m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Detail Setting pata OK 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit PDF A Kad OK Oixeraa PDF A la PDF A 1b 1 10 In the Sys
153. P Port Number 25 1 65535 2 33 Preparation before Use 3 Enter the appropriate values to each field Setting Description Set to send e mail from the machine SMTP Protocol Set SMTP protocol Set the SMTP E mail TX setting to On on the Protocol Settings page SMTP Server Name Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP Use the SMTP default port 25 SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time out in seconds Authentication Protocol Set whether SMTP authentication is used To use authentication enter the user information for authentication SMTP Security POP before SMTP Timeout Set SMTP security Turn on SMTP Security in SMTP E mail TX on the Protocol Settings page Specify the time in seconds until the connection to the POP server times outs This can be set when POP before SMTP is selected in Authentication Protocol Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct Domain Restriction Set whether or not domains are restricted Click the Domain List and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected Restriction can also be specified by e mail address Set to receive e mail at the machine POP3 Protocol Set POP3 protocol Set the POP3 E mail RX setting to On on the Protocol Settings p
154. Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to change delete are registered for 3 seconds Menu appears To replace the registered settings with the current settings press the A or V key to select Overwrite and then press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to change the settings To delete the registered settings press the A or V key to select Delete and then press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key to delete the registered settings Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered The current settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings 3 4 Basic Operation ID Card Copy The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key indicator is off Copy NOTE If the Message Display is turned off press the any key on the operation panel and wait for the machine to warm up 2 Place the original on the platen Put the scanning side facedown in the center of Statement or A5 size scanning area NOTE For loading instructions refer to Loading Originals on page 2 59 3 Press the Program 1 Recalled The ID Card Copy function is recalled Program 1 4 Press the Start key Scanning begins Turn over the original on the platen and press the Start key 6
155. Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default i Color e election Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select EcoPrint 6 Press the OK key EcoPrint appears EcoPrint pai OK ol Oft 02 On 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the GE screen returns to the Function Default menu File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name default for jobs Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No can also be set The table below lists the additional information available Item Description None No additional information available Date Adds date and time Job No Adds the job number Job No Date Adds the job number plus date and time Date Job No Adds date and time plus the job number NOTE e Refer to page 4 16 and page 5 15 for name entry e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 8 55 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the default file name 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m lol Language Default Screen Sound
156. Press the OK key Zoom appears Zoom bmg OK lo 100 Auto 7 Press the A or V key to select 100 or Auto 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Collate Set the defaults for Collate The table below shows the available settings Collate Off Collate not performed On Collate performed NOTE Refer to page 3 15 for Collate Offset Use the procedure below to set the default Collate Offset settings 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 50 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m 01I Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Collate 6 Press the OK key Collate appears Collate bmg OK off 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu GE Orig Orientation Set the original orientation defaults The available default settings
157. Registered numbers Edit exceeded and return to the Address Book 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter each item Entering Contact Name 1 Press the lt or D key to select Contact Name Detail lt OK Contact Name 177 Sally Edit 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Contact Name ace OK appears Sallyl A ABC Text 3 Enter the contact name If creating a new contact name the address number allocated to the destination is already entered 4 Press the OK key The contact name is registered 8 123 Default Setting System Menu Entering E mail Address Detail MeE mail Address 4 7 C_mauryGHHHHtH ttt FE Edit Text 1 Press the lt or gt key to display E mail Address 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Address Entry 7 0 appears 3 Enter the e mail address NOTE Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One touch keys Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 25 4 Press the OK key The e mail address is registered Entering Folder SMB FTP Address Folder SMB Address The table below explains the items to be entered Host Name Description Host name or IP address of
158. Return the drum unit to its position aligning the guides at both ends with the slots in the machine 6 Insert the developer unit together with the toner container back into the machine Close the front cover The machine warms up and resumes printing 10 16 Troubleshooting Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper by Rear Cover Follow the steps below to clear paper jams of the rear cover 1 pulling it out NN N ANN Z ZZ Z ZF 2 CAUTION The fuser unit inside the machine is hot Do not touch it as it may result in burn injury If the paper is jammed inside the fuser unit open the fuser cover and remove the paper by pulling it out 2 Close the rear cover and open and close the top cover q to clear the error The machine warms up and resumes Wy W WN printing Remove all of the originals from the document feed tray Document Processor Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor 1 2 Open the left cover of the document processor 10 17 Troubleshooting 3 Remove the jammed original If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to remove proceed to the next step 4 Open the document processor 5 Remove the jammed original If the original tears remove every loose scrap from inside the machine 6 Close the document processor 7 Place the originals 10 18 11 Management This chapter explains the followin
159. Select key Login J NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters User Job Account gt User Login Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Each Job Account RD Center eUI R amp D DEPT The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Each Job Account Press the OK key The Each Job Accounting menu appears Press the A or V key to select the account of which you want to check counts 11 34 Management GUI DESIGN gt 0 Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages Exit Scanned Pages lt 0 Copy 1 4 1234567 Limit 1234567 GUI DESIGN gt Printed Pages Scanned Pages Counter Reset Exit Reset counter Are you sure eGUI DESIGN Yes No 9 Press the OK key A menu for the account appears 10 Press the A or V key to select the function of which you want to check counts and then press the OK key If you select Printed Pages select the item for which you want to check printed page counts and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items If you sel
160. Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Sleep Level Press the OK key Sleep Level appears Press A or V key to select Quick Recovery or Energy Saver Press the OK key When Energy Saver is selected Energy Saver appears When Quick Recovery is selected Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Setting screen Press A or V key to select the condition to be set Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Energy Saver menu 8 38 Default Setting System Menu Sleep Timer The time until the machine enters sleep mode can be set For Europe 30 ppm model 1 to 60 minutes 1minute increments 35 ppm model 1 to 120 minutes 1minute increments Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes 1minute increments Use the procedure below to set the Sleep Timer The default setting is 1 minute Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings lol Language fault Screen Sound De Exit lt gt wi Login User Name Login Password Login Timer Setting ol Auto Panel Reset PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit lt gt wi 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the
161. System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and SER E E press Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 11 15 Management User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set lt AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Job Accounting Sma OK lol Oft On The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Job Accounting 7 Press the OK key Job Accounting appears 8 Press the A or V key to select On To disable job accounting select Off 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Account Set menu NOTE When the display returns to the System Menu default screen logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears To continue the operation enter the Account ID
162. T Do not use thinner or other organic solvents al f eS L A Document Processor If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth The message Clean the slit glass may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning NOTE Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth Do not use water soap or solvents for cleaning 1 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass a 2 Wipe the white guide b on the document processor 3 Close the document processor 9 2 Maintenance Cleaning the Machine To avoid print quality problems the interior of the machine must be cleaned with every toner container replacement 1 Open the front cover 2 Lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine 3 Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the 9 green levers with both hands NOTE The drum unit is sensitive to light Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes 4 Place the drum unit flat on a clean level surface IMPORTANT Do not place the drum unit on end 5 Usea clean lint free cloth to clean dust and dirt away from the metal registration roller
163. T LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE xxiii Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribut
164. TN TE en 8 154 Optional Network 00 00 cece teens 8 164 NW InterfaceSend 0 f4 ce cana ia ee ea pe eae ee ee i ee eae 8 172 Interface Block Setting 00 ee radaran AENA E EREE 8 173 Security Level Security Level setting 0 0 00 eee 8 177 Optional Functions 0 00 cece eee eee 8 177 Maintenance CICANING soiree ea eee dad aed we dad T EENE vedas Gand A bedee aan 9 2 Toner Container Replacement n a nananana naa 9 5 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions 22 0 ise eeidd eaa a a Gis aa eaea 10 2 iii Contents 11 Responding to Error MessageS 1 1 2 0 eee 10 6 Clearing Paper Jams 3 e c4 ccciaee eda eden tebe beavers aw AE did eens 10 13 Management User Login Administration 0 0 00 eee 11 2 JOB ACCOUNIING se ebie Pee ode hate es aed edd ee ee ee hae God ae PS ee 11 15 Checking the Counter 0 0 r nnrir nba a eae 11 38 Appendix Optional Equipment 00 iradi gaa in eee Appendix 2 Character Entry Method 000 eee eee eee Appendix 5 Papeleria aa adnan gee dla ee ae OE a ek Wd pace Appendix 9 Specifications sssaaa odin dW ee We eRe eae he geo te ae bees Appendix 18 ENINSO TIT ounit erasoan Ga Pe EEE Ea eRe Ee a a ea E ees Appendix 22 EK ITB 2000 P maae ida a Re BAe OPS LSE ee 1 ee Appendix 22 GIOSSANY 2a ve var debe eae Ra ON eee nes Se Gee Ree Appendix 23 NWN OX ange Baik nee ated aa ele pokes Senate yw a ath seks ate doe a abe a
165. TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence XXIV Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1 2 11 12 Software shall mean the digitally encoded machine readable scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging Under the terms of this License Agreement you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained
166. The following zoom options are available Auto Zoom Letter R lt A4 Zoom Entry 129 141 amp 64 70 Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size Statement R A5 Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1 increments between 25 and 400 Standard Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications The following magnifications are available Zoom Level OriginalCopy Inch Standard 100 400 Max 200 129 Statement gt gt Letter Models 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement 50 25 Min Other 141 A5 gt gt A4 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt A5 Metric Standard 100 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 Models 115 B5 gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 70 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Other 129 Statement gt gt Letter 90 Folio gt gt A4 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement Metric Standard 100 400 Max 200 141 A5 gt gt A4 Models 115 B5 gt gt A4 90 Folio gt gt A4 86 A4 gt gt B5 Asia 70 A4 gt gt A5 50 25 Min Pacific Other 129 Statement gt gt Letter 78 Legal gt gt Letter 64 Letter gt gt Statement 3 10 Basic Operation The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below
167. V key to select TCP IP 8 144 Default Setting System Menu TCP I Ga lol Off 2 On TCP IP Settings m TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit IPv4 Setting pata OK DHCP IP Address Exit Auto IP pata OK Off 8 Press the OK key TCP IP appears 9 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu 10 11 12 13 14 OK key Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting appears Press the A or V key to select Auto IP Press the OK key Auto IP appears Press the A or V key to select Off and then press the Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 145 Default Setting System Menu TCP IP IPv6 Setup Set up TCP IP IPv6 to connect to the network The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to setup the TCP IP IPv6 setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and MENEE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login
168. X No NOTE e If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges e Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Edit Destination FAX Document Box fi Edit Destination Exit 2 Press the OK key The Edit Destination menu appears Edit Destination gt 01 Addressbook Print List Exit Press the A or V key to select Address Book 4 Press the OK key The Address Book list screen Addressbook gt appears afzate NOTE If the destinations are not registered there is no list amp Maury in the Address Book Menu 5 Press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Menu Kna ok Detail Edit Delete Add Address 8 122 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the A or V key to select Add Address 7 Press the OK key Add Address appears Add Address lt m Group 8 Press the A or V key to select Contact 9 Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing Detail lt 0 destinations Contact Name 1 7 sally NOTE If the maximum number of destinations has already l been registered the screen will display
169. Z sob Status gt V Status Message Sleeping The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as their current status NOTE If the screen There is a problem with this website s security certificate is displayed configure the certificate For details on Certificates refer to the Command Center RX User Guide You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate 3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen When you log in to the machine as an administrator you will see Device Settings Function Settings Network Settings Security Settings and Management Settings 2 30 Preparation before Use Changing Security Settings This section explains how to change the security settings 1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on 2 30 2 From the Security Settings menu select the setting you want to configure The configurable settings are Device Security Send Security Network Security and Certificates KYOCERA Model Command Center EX Host Nar Loca N A s Last Updated a Home English 2013 08 23 13 36 05 2 Admin Status m Printer Ready Scanner Ready GE Device Information gt Fe Preparing w m a e FF Job Status Status Message Sleeping Document Box Address Book Status 2 Not in Use FR Device Settings Gps en TE N
170. a Re In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Date Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Time Zone Press the OK key Time Zone appears Press the A or V key to select your location Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu NOTE If you select a region that does not utilize summer time the summer time setting screen will not appear 8 30 Default Setting System Menu Summer Time Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date Use the procedure below to set Summer Time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Date Setting and press GE the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name Wm password with administrator privileges to log i
171. age Check Interval Specify the interval for checking for incoming e mail in minutes Run once now Click Receive to connect to the POP3 server immediately and check for incoming E mails Domain Restriction Set whether or not domains are restricted Click the Domain List and enter the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected Restriction can also be specified by e mail address POP3 User Settings Configure the settings for POP3 user accounts and the POP3 server You can configure up to three users 2 34 Preparation before Use Setting Description E mail Send Settings 4 Click Submit E mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E mail that can be sent in kilobytes When E mail size is greater than this value an error message appears and E mail sending is cancelled Use this setting if you have set E mail Size Limit for SMTP server If not enter a value of 0 zero to enable E mail sending regardless of the size limit Sender Address Enter the E mail address of the person responsible for the machine such as the machine administrator so that a reply or non delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters Signature Enter the signature The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E mail body
172. ail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Sender Info to see the complete destination information Press the OK key to return to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen Display Key Details Acceptance No of job Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan amp MStoring Job FAX 4 Storing Job Printer B Job Name Job name or file name is displayed Status Status of job k no icon Storing Waiting Storing Data 7 7 Status Job Cancel Checking Job History Check the history of completed jobs NOTE Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer Available Job History Screens The job histories are displayed separately in three screens Print Jobs Send Jobs Store Jobs and Scheduled Jobs The following job histories are available Job histories to be displayed Print Job Copy Printer FAX reception E mail reception Printing data from Document Box Job Report List Printing data from removable memory Send Job Store Job FAX PC SMB FTP E mail Application Multiple destination Printer USB memory Scheduled Job Displaying Print J
173. ails refer to Emulation Set on 8 84 e If connecting by Bonjour enable Bonjour in the machine s network settings For details refer to Bonjour Settings on 8 147 e Inthe Authenticate screen enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system 1 Insert the DVD This section explains how to install the printer driver in Mac OS 000 A Kyocera 2 Double click Kyocera OS X vx x depending on your en Seo Ce S Mac OS version STR Common files Document OS X 10 2 and 10 3 Only A a pE OS X 10 4 Only OS X 10 5 or higher Readme pdf x 6 items Zero KB available 4 555 TSK 10 5 or higher 3 Double click Kyocera OS X 10 5 Gi 2 MEn Cele C DEVICES v 7 SHARED E Kyocera OS X 10 5 build gt PLACES PDL Setup SEARCH FOR x 2 items Zero KB available 5 2 22 Preparation before Use ht 4 The printer driver installation program starts up W KYOCERA es installer Introduction Read Me You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software License Destination Select Installation Type Installation Summary _ GoBack Continue 5 Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software This completes the printer driver installation If a USB connection is used the machine is au
174. ained in this Agreement No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party By opening this diskette package you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement XXV Energy Saving Control Function The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time Low Power Mode The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened For more information refer to Low Power Mode on page 2 7 Sleep The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened For more information see Energy Saver Function on page 2 7 Automatic 2 Sided Copy Function This device includes 2 sided copying as a standard function For example by copying two 1 sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2 sided copy it is possible to lower the amount of paper used For more information see Energy Saver Function on
175. al 18 sheets min First Copy Time When the document processor is not used 6 9 seconds or less A4 feed from Cassette When using the document processor 7 9 seconds or less Zoom Level Manual mode 25 to 400 1 increments Fixed magnifications 400 200 141 129 115 90 86 78 70 64 50 25 Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets can be set in one sheet increments Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Supported Original Types Sheet Book 3 dimensional objects maximum original size Folio Legal Original Feed System Fixed Appendix 20 Printer functions Item Description Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed First Print Time A4 feed from Cassette 7 0 seconds or less Resolution Fast 1200 600 dpi 300 dpi Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 Apple Macintosh OS 10 x Interface Standard USB Interface Connector 1 USB Hi Speed USB Host 1 USB Hi Speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX 1000 BASE T Page Description Language PRESCRIBE Emulation Scanner functions PCL6 PCL5e PCL XL KPDL3 PostScript 3 compatible PDF Direct Print Ver 1 7 Line Printer IBM Proprinter X24E EPSON LQ 850 Item Description Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Resolution 600 dpi
176. ally or horizontally Have you selected 200x100dpi Normal or 200x400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution Select a scan resolution other than 200 x 100dpi Normal or 200 x 400dpi Super Fine when sending an image USB memory not recognized Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine Is the USB host blocked Select Unblock in the USB host settings Vertical streaks appear on prints Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass The inside of the machine may be dirty Check the toner container and if necessary replace The top edge or back of the paper is dirty The inside of the machine may be dirty Clean the inside of the machine Part of the image is periodically faint or shows white lines Is the developer unit attached correctly Attach the developer unit correctly Open and then close the rear cover 10 4 Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot send via SMB Check Points Is the network cable connected Corrective Actions Connect the correct network cable securely Reference Page Have the network settings for the equipment been configured properly Configure the TCP IP settings properly Have the folder sharing settings been configured properly Check sharing settings and access privileges under the folder properties Has the SMB protocol been set to On Set the SMB protocol setting t
177. anch Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 44 9084949 Fax 41 44 9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions Deutschland GmbH Otto Hahn Strasse 12 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 9180 Fax 49 2159 918100 il il i i KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Vienna Austria Phone 43 1 863380 Fax 43 1 86338 400 KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 550 00 Fax 46 8 546 550 10 KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf Postboks 150 Oppsal 0619 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 Fax 47 22 62 72 00 KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A S Ejby Industrivej 60 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 70223880 Fax 45 45765850 KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisboa Portugal Phone 351 21 843 6780 Fax 351 21 849 3312 KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa Pty Ltd KYOCERA House Hertford Office Park 90 Bekker Road Cnr Allandale Midrand South Africa Phone 27 11 540 2600 Fax 27 11 466 3050 KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC Botanichesky pereulok 5 Moscow 129090 Russia Phone 7 495 741 0004 Fax 7 495 741 0018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East Dubai Internet City Bldg 17 Office 157 P O Box 500817 Dubai United Arab Emirates Phone 971 04 433 0412 KYOCERA Document Sol
178. aper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 56 Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder cassettes 2 and 3 specify the paper size Also you use a media type other than plain paper specify the media type setting Selection Item Selectable Size Type Paper Size Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Letter Legal Statement and Oficio II Metric size A4 A5 A6 B5 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 and Custom Media Type Plain Rough Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Prepunched Letterhead High Quality and Custom 1 8 Statement and A6 can only be used in cassette 1 Envelopes can not be used in the cassette as the media type kk NOTE If using the machine with the fax function the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below Plain Recycled Bond Color High Quality and Rough 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Login User Name m not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the When you are performing user management and have user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters When you are not performing user management
179. appears Service Setting lt m Service Status Network Status New Developer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Service Status or Network Status 6 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Print Are you sure The screen shown is the one when Network Status is Network Status selected Yes I No 7 Press Yes the Left Select key The selected report is output Accepted is displayed and the screen returns to the Service Setting menu NOTE When acceptance of jobs is prohibited Print storing functions are restricted now is displayed and the output is canceled Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete The table below shows the available settings The default setting is Error Only Item Description No result report printed Result report automatically printed Transmitted images can also be attached Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error If two or more destinations are registered the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors Transmitted images can also be attached Use the procedure below to send a Result Report 7 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Report Counter System Network Exit 8 114 Default Setting System Menu 2 Pre
180. appears qe Default Screen m Address Book 5 Press the A or V key to select Destination or Address Book 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send menu Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images Displaying Send and Forward Menu i oe 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Send Counter System Network Exit 2 Press the OK key The Send menu appears Send lt m Select Key Set DestinationCheck Default Screen Exit 8 103 Default Setting System Menu Forward Send and Forward lt m Forward Destination Select whether to forward the original Send and Forward lt m Forward Destination Forward O ol Off On Forward Sma OK 0M E mail Oo OI Folder SMB o OE Folder FTP Oo Select Send and Forward lt m Destination 3 Press the A or V key to select Send and Forward 4 Press the OK key The Send and Forward menu appears 1 Inthe Send and Forward menu press the A or V key to select Forward 2 Press the OK key Forward appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Off or on If On is selected and the OK key is pressed the Forward Rule screen appears If Off is selected and the OK key is pressed p
181. are the default user s properties User Name DeviceAdmin Login User Name 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Login Password 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Access Level Administrator It is recommended to periodically change the user name login user name and login password regularly for your security Use the procedure below to register a new user NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel System Menu Counter Management Sys Menu Count 0m User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J User Job Account i lol User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit User Login Set gt User Login Local User List Exit Local User List m e amp DeviceAdmin Menu Menu lt gt OK Detail Edit Delete Add User User Name OK ial A ABC Text 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select User Login Set 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears 6 Press the
182. ation refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and e E a press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Optional Network 4 Press the OK key The Optional Network screen Optional Network gt appears Basic Exit TCP IP Settings This selects the TCP IP settings The options available in the TCP IP Settings are as follows e TCP IP 8 166 e IPv4 Setting 8 166 IPv6 Setting 8 166 8 164 Default Setting System Menu Sys Menu Count Report Counter System Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Optional Network gt Basic Basic 0m TCP IP Settings Bonjour Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Sy
183. ayed NOTE If you select Off for Auto Error Clear the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings Default Screen Sound Exit 8 33 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J Timer Setting lt gt m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit Err Clear Timer 5 495 E em Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Timer Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Err Clear Timer Press the OK key Err Clear Timer appears Press the A or V key to set the Error Clear Timer Set the amount of time before clearing errors in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu 8 34 Default Setting System Menu Low Power Timer The time until the machine enters low power mod
184. canning Image using Application 0 0 0 ee 5 25 Document Box Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory 00 00 e eee eee eee 6 2 Saving Documents to USB Memory Scan to USB 0 0 0 0 ce ee 6 5 Removing USB Memory 000 eee eee 6 7 Printing from a Job BOX 6 ene eee 6 8 Status Job Cancel Checking Job Status e eee raaa ba oe ee cae deed ee oe ee Dae ea wee nae 7 2 Checking Job HISO e ers ae ee ae eed bse eae O eed sad Gee De acc ane alate Racal 7 8 Sending the Job Log History 0 0 eee ae 7 13 Pause and Resumption of Jobs 00000 cee tee eee 7 19 Canceling Of JODS 0224 ea sae tae bee eee a ee ee ee ee ee eed ae 7 19 Device Communication 0 0 000 0 eee 7 20 Default Setting System Menu COMMON SCUINGS cess dra ro eA ee Pa ee a Ae Da ee a oe te 8 2 COPY S SUMS espira de SEE ans Nee E ge Abe aay ako EE ay E NEEE ae epg arate 8 79 Printer SQuinGS 2 44 2604 006 da pant Qawali wedai dan vieda sleet sea ane eee 8 84 Sending SettingS 0 0 cece Da tet Ea 8 100 Document Box Settings 0 0 0 cee eee 8 107 Printing Reports Sending Notice 20 eee 8 111 Adjustment Maintenance 00 tee 8 116 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys 00 00 eee eee 8 122 Restarting the System 2 0 6 0 cen eee 8 135 Network Setups cae naga eee eee ee Ga he be ea Dee we dace a a 8 136 NetWork SCU ecca 402 ban edie bere a eeddia Sieaweeda bien
185. capacity and longer scanning and sending times The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal 200x200dpi Fine 200x400dpi Super Fine 300x300dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine or 600x600dpi The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below 1 2 3 Function Menu pata OK 0I Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 5 Scan Resolution m 200x400dpi S Fin o4 300x300dpi 400x400dpi U Fin 6 7 8 Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Scan Resolution Press the OK key Scan Resolution appears Press the A or V key to select the desired scan resolution Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 12 Sending Functions Color Selection This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images You can select from Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images 1 2 3 Function Menu bmg OK 0I Color Selection O Original S
186. ceiving print data from the computer the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically prints paper The options are between 5 and 495 seconds Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout _ 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Printer Common Settings Copy Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer 0m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select FormFeed Timeout 4 Press the OK key FormFeed Timeout appears FormFeed TimeOut M 5 495 P30 Som 5 Press the A or V key to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code character code OAH The table below shows the available settings The default setting is LF Only Item Description LF Only Only line feed performed LF and CR Line feed and character return performed Ignore LF No line feed performed Use the procedure below to specify a LF action 8 92 Default Setting System Menu
187. cessor is opened Keep the document processor open if the original is 25 mm or thicker rer N E L ma 2 Place the original Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plate with the back left corner as the reference point HT ren I 3 Close the the original cover or the document processor IMPORTANT Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass Do not close the document processor when the original is 25 mm or thicker NOTE Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open faced originals CAUTION Do not leave the document processor open as A there is a danger of personal injury 2 59 Preparation before Use Loading Originals in the Document Processor The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals Both sides of two sided originals are scanned Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals Weight 50 to 120 g m duplex 50 to 110 g m Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5 Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement Capacity Plain paper Colored paper Recycled paper High quality paper 50 sheets Thick paper 110 g m2 36 sheets Thick paper 120 g m 33 sheets Art paper 1 sheet Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the
188. character type switches as follows ABC 123 Symbol Text ABC 123 Text Symbols lt gt JLI ESHE O 55 lt PRISA aT Text Symbols characters you can directly display the Symbols screen Appendix 6 Entering Characters After selecting a character type use the procedure below to enter characters Entering Alphabets and Numerals Referring to the table below press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed Entry mode Alphabetic Symbol Available characters OL Numeric Alphabetic Symbol abcABC2 Numeric 2 Alphabetic Symbol defDEF3 Numeric 3 Alphabetic Symbol ghiGHI4 Numeric Alphabetic Symbol 4 jkIJKL5 Numeric 5 Alphabetic Symbol mnoMNO6 Numeric 6 Alphabetic Symbol pqarsPQRS 7 JKL MNO PQRS Numeric 7 4 lt Alphabetic Symbol tuvTUV8 Numeric 8 Alphabetic Symbol wxyzWxXYZ9 Numeric 9 Alphabetic Symbol _ space 0 Numeric 0 Alphabetic Symbol Switch between upper lowercase Numeric or decimal point Alphabetic Symbol Numeric i C8 is entered when 123 is selected in the character type selection or is entered when only numerals are entered and no character type is selec
189. ck Set Security Level Exit 8 137 Default Setting System Menu Network Setting TCP IP Setting WSD SCAN WSD PRINT lt gt wi TCP IP Settings TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting om Exit TCP IP gt oK Off TCP IP Settings TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit za OK IPv4 Setting DHCP Auto IP IP Address Exit om Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP 8 Press the OK key TCP IP appears 9 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu 10 Press the A or V key to select IPv4 Setting 11 Press the OK key The IPv4 Setting menu appears 12 Press the A or V key to select DHCP 8 138 Default Setting System Menu 13 Press the OK key DHCP appears DHCP gt 0 Off 14 Press the A or V key to select Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting men
190. ck paper or transparency click the Media Type menu and select the media type 3 16 Basic Operation 7 Click Source and select the paper source NOTE If you choose Auto source selection papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray 8 Select paper orientation either Portrait or Landscape to match the orientation of the document Selecting Rotated will print the document rotated 180 9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box 10 Click OK button to start printing Printing by AirPrint AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4 2 and later products and Mac OS X 10 7 and later products You can connect to the machine and print without installing a printer driver To allow the machine to be found when printing by AirPrint you can set machine location information in Command Center RX For details refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Printing Using Half Speed Mode When printing on a paper with a smooth surface or thick paper adjust the printing speed using the printer driver For details refer to Printer Driver User Guide Basic Operation Sending This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E mail message or to a PC linked to the network In order to do this it is nec
191. cols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network TCP IP IPv6 TCP IP IPv6 is based on the current Internet protocol TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 is the next generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4 while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission TWAIN Technology Without Any Interested Name A technical specification for connecting scanners digital cameras and other image equipment to the computers The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software e g Adobe Photoshop and OCR software USB Universal Serial Bus 2 0 A USB interface standard for Hi Speed USB 2 0 The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps This machine is equipped with USB 2 0 for high speed data transfer WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition A function to import images supported after Windows Me XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices This function replaces what TWAIN used to do the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application Appendix 25 Appendix 26 Index Index Numerics 1 sided 2 sided Sel
192. considerations Store paper in a cool well ventilated place e Store paper flat and unopened in the package Once the package is opened reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while Store paper sealed in the original package and box Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors Before using paper that has been stored keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours e Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat sunlight or dampness Other Paper Specifications Porosity The density of the paper fibers Stiffness Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine causing jams Curl Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened When paper passes through the fixing unit it curls upward slightly To deliver flat printouts load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray Static electricity During printing paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together Whiteness Paper whiteness affects print contrast Use whiter paper for sharper brighter copies Quality Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square edges are rough sheets are uncut or edges or corners are crushed In order to prevent these
193. creen returns to the basic screen Press the Start key Copying begins When 1 sided gt gt 2 sided is selected press End Scan the Right Select key when original scanning finishes 3 14 Basic Operation Collate Copying The machine can collate at the same time as it copies You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number 3 Original The procedure for using collate copying is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Km OK Collate O Duplex Oo Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select Collate 3 Press the OK key Collate appears Collate gt ok OTE 4 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 5 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 6 Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies and press the Start key Copying begins 3 15 Basic Operation Printing Printing from Applications Follow the steps below to print documents from applications NOTE To print the document from applications install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD Product Library anges separated by commas For example 1 3 5 12 al Print Le
194. cribes the action taken Immediately Job stops when the counter reaches its limit Subsequently Printing scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and ET press Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 11 27 Management User Job Account gt User Login Job Account Set Unknown ID Set Job Exit Job Account Set 01 Job Accounting AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Default Setting V lol Apply Limit Copy Print Count Counter Limit Exit Apply Limit lt Immediately 02 Subsequentl Alert Only 10 11 Press the A o
195. crosoftwor Il Resume Menu Menu Sma OK 01 Detail Cancel Job Job will be canceled Are you sure 0008 8doc00010320 Yes No During a printing or sending job press the Stop key The Job Cancel List menu appears NOTE Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job but does not pause a sending job Press the A or V key to select the type of job you want to stop and then press the OK key An output queue of the selected job type is displayed Press the A or V key to select the job you want to stop and then press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Cancel Job and then press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Right Select key The screen displays Canceling and returns to the output queue of the selected job type after the job is canceled To cancel other jobs repeat steps 3 to 5 3 28 Basic Operation Checking Remaining Toner and Paper You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette Checking Remaining Toner 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu 3 Status lt 0 appears Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause 2 Pressthe A or V key to select Toner Status 3 Press the OK key Toner Status appears Toner Status oK The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one of 10 os MENAO0O0O0O0O0O 1002 ENE
196. ct key 2 Press the A or V key to select Delete and then press the OK key 11 10 Management Enabling Disabling Group Authentication 3 Inthe delete confirmation screen press Yes the Left Select key The user is deleted and the screen returns to Local User List This enables group authentication using the LDAP server This menu can be used only when Netwk Authentic is selected as the user authentication method For details of LDAP server settings refer to the Operation Guide of the LDAP server Use the procedure below to enable group authentication NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters System Menu Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login Unknown User Job Account i User Login Set Job Account Set ID Job Exit User Login Set m lol User Login Local User List Group Auth Exit 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and 1 1 press Login the Right Select key The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set
197. d is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu When KPDL Auto Is Selected for Emulation If you use the KPDL Auto emulation mode KPDL and another emulation mode can be automatically switched according to the data alternative emulation For alternative emulation you can select one of the following printers The default setting is PCLE6 e Line Printer e IBM Proprinter e EPSON LQ 850 e PCL6 Also as when you select KPDL Auto set whether or not to output KPDL error reports The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 In Emulation Set press the A or V key to select Emulation Set gt KPDL Auto PCL6 KPDL KPDL Auto 2 Press the OK key Alt Emulation appears Alt Emulation gt oK DIABLO 630 EPSON LQ 850 o5 PCLG6 8 86 Default Setting System Menu EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem KPDL Error Rpt gt 0m ol Off On Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting Sys Menu Count Common Settings Copy Printer Exit Printer O Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit EcoPrint O ol OfF 02 On 1 Press the A or V key to select the printer for alternative emulation Press the OK key KPDL Error Rpt ap
198. d OK Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit Job Log History m Send History Destination Exit 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel The Sys Menu Count menu appears When you are performing user management and have not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for di details on entering characters 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Report 3 Press the OK key The Report menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Log History 5 Press the OK key The Job Log History menu appears 7 13 Status Job Cancel Setting the destination Set the destination to which job log histories are sent Use the procedure below to set the destination Job Log History m Auto Sending Send History Exit Destination Kad OK Confirmation Register Exit Confirming Current Destination Destination Kad ox Confirmation Register Exit Dest Confirm Kma ox MMorgan tttttttt tt I Exit 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to select Destination 2 Press the OK key The Destination menu appears 1 Inthe Destination menu press the A or V key to select Confirmation 2 Press the OK key Dest Confirm
199. d next to the icon When TWAIN send or WSD send is executed Application appears next to the icon Destination Destination Either destination name FAX number E mail address or server name Status of job BE Sending no icon Sending Waiting II Pausing the job X Stop sending 7 5 Status Job Cancel Store Job Status screen Status Kma oK Send Job Status Store Job Status Pause Store Job Status 0m 0008 A44Scan O009s gmaury s data 0010 Gaaaa 1 2 3 4 0009 Detail 0 Status 1 8 Processing 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select Store Job Status 3 Press the OK key Store Job Status appears Press the A or V key to check the store queue Press the OK key to check detailed information of the selected job NOTE You can also check the job information by pressing Menu the Right Select key and selecting Detail in the menu that appears Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Sender Info destination information 7 6 Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Det
200. d the Ready to send screen returns to the basic screen Dest 1 sal Ly CHi EE NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new 1 sided 300x300dpi destination page 8 107 is set to On a screen to confirm Duplex ScanRes the entered e mail address appears Enter the same e mail address again and press the OK key 7 If there are additional destinations press the Add Destination key Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter additional destinations Up to 100 destinations can be specified 8 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the registered destinations Press the A or V key to select a destination and press Dest Confirm lt 0 the OK key Then you can edit or delete the destination WHaaaaaaaaaQ tt tiii Press Exit the Right Select key to return to the basic Mbbbbbbbbb ttttt ttt aon Exit 9 Press the Start key Transmission starts NOTE If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission page 8 107 is set to On the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed 3 20 Basic Operation Send to Folder SMB Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server NOTE e Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Command Center RX
201. details on entering characters Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 8 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 16 Copying Functions Print Override This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately When the interrupt copy job is completed the machine resumes the suspended print job Function Menu pai OK Collate O Duplex oO Exit Print Override Sai OK On 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears 2 Press the A or V key to select Print Override 3 Press the OK key Print Override appears 4 Press the A or V key to select On Press the OK key Completed is displayed the machine is put into the interruption copy mode and the basic screen appears 6 Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion as a normal copy job When the interrupt copy job is completed the machine resumes the suspended print job NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu Copying Functions Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward Sharpen When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos in which moire patt
202. dn PN 19 29 64 x 16 9 64 x 14 13 32 494 x 410 x 366 mm ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn 19 29 64 x 16 15 16 x 17 41 64 494 x 430 x 448 mm ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn 19 29 64 x 16 15 16 x 17 41 64 494 x 430 x 448 mm Weight without toner container ECOSYS M2030dn PN Approx 33 Ib Approx 15 kg ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn Approx 40 Ib Approx 18 kg ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn Approx 40 Ib Approx 18 kg Space Required W x D ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn 19 29 64 x 24 1 8 494 x 613 mm ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn 19 29 64 x 24 59 64 494 x 633 mm Power Requirement 120 V Specification Model 120 V AC 60 Hz 8 0 A 230 V Specification Model 220 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 4 2 A Power Consumption Maximum ECOSYS M2030dn PN Standard 927 W European countries With options 941 W European countries ECOSYS M2030dn Standard 961 W European countries With options 967 W European countries ECOSYS M2035dn Standard 976 W U S A Canada 972 W European countries With options 979 W U S A Canada 978 W European countries ECOSYS M2530dn Standard 962 W European countries With options 967 W European countries ECOSYS M2535dn Standard 977 W U S A Canada 972 W European countries With options 981 W U S A Canada 978 W European countries Appendix 19 Item
203. does not respond when the power switch is turned on Check Points Is the machine plugged in Corrective Actions Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Reference Page Pressing the Start key does not produce copies Is there a message on the Message Display Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly Is the machine in Sleep mode Press the any key on the operation panel to recover the machine from Sleep mode The machine will be ready to copy within 15 seconds Blank sheets are ejected Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen place them face down and align them with the slit glass When placing originals in the document processor place them face up Printouts are too light Is the machine in Manual Density mode Select the correct density level When changing the default density level adjust the density manually and choose the desired level Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container Shake the toner container from side to side about several times Is there a message indicating the addition of toner Replace the toner container Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Is EcoPrint mode enabled Disable EcoPrint mode Make sure the paper type setting is correct the paper being used Printouts are too dark Is the machine in Auto Density mode
204. dy 5 16 File Name 4 16 5 15 Subject 5 16 Error Handling 8 25 Error Messages 10 6 Expansion Memory Appendix 2 F File Format 5 9 File Name 4 16 File Separation 5 22 FTP Appendix 23 FTP Encrypted TX 5 21 5 25 G GPL LGPL xxiii Grayscale Appendix 23 Image Quality Copy 3 7 Send 5 10 Included Guides 2 Installation Precautions xvii Interface Block 8 173 IP Address Appendix 24 IPP Appendix 24 Index 2 Index Job Available Status 7 2 Canceling 3 28 7 19 Checking History 7 8 Checking Status 7 2 Pause and Resumption 7 19 Sending the Job Log History 7 13 Job Accounting 11 15 Managing the Copier Printer Counts 11 23 Restricting the Use of the Machine 11 25 Job Box 8 107 Job Retention Deletion 8 108 Quick Copy Jobs 8 107 Job Finish Notice 5 19 Copy 4 14 Send 5 19 K KPDL Appendix 24 L Label Appendix 16 LAN Cable Connecting 2 5 Legal Information xxii Login 3 2 11 5 Logout 3 2 11 5 Management 11 1 Job Accounting 11 15 User Login Administration 11 2 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxv Multi Purpose MP Tray Appendix 24 Paper Size and Media 2 56 8 14 Multi Sending Sending to Different Types of Destinations 3 27 N NetBEUI Appendix 24 Network Setup 2 14 Network Cable 2 4 Connecting 2 5 Network Interface 2 4 Network Security 8 154 Network Setup Bonjour Settings 8 147 FTP Reception 8 151 HTTP 8 151 HTTPS 8 151 IPP over SSL 8 151 LAN Interface 8 136 L
205. e Dotted Positioning Mark The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Collate Oo Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Combine Press the OK key Combine appears Combine Smid OK ooff gt in I 4 in 6 Press the A or V key to select 2 in1 or 4 in 1 7 Press Detail the Right Select key A 8 Press the A or V key to select the desired layout and 2 in 1 Layout V0 then press the OK key EIR to L Copying Functions Border Line bmg OK Solid Line i Dotted Line Orig Orientation gt fiTop Edge Top 10 11 Press the A or V key to select the desired border line type and then press the OK key Press the A or V key to select the orientation of the original and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Press the Start key Scanning begins If the original is placed on the platen replace the original and press the Start key After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Functio
206. e rreo cee k cnet dee ba eee ee eee eee bebe eb eee oo xix Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning 0 0 cece eae xix Legal and Safety Information 00 c ec eee xxi 1 Part Names Operation Panel is 444 425 b0484 44 bGe4 abd de ead a ad bade ea eda ee ea a 1 2 MaChin E EEE as Cad seas augadhads oa dela betula ee dame ga 1 4 Document Processo aa Lerraga nas Erkan Ge bea ieee Mees Yew eee ceed eS 1 6 2 Preparation before Use Check bundled items 5 625 0c heb ee ee ee eee ee ee eee 2 2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables 2 220055 2 3 Connecting Cables ns 25 0004 venues EE RERA eee eee een awa eats aoa 2 5 Power On Ofl c2 028s 9e bo 7aboogdderdtideeedoretavegeadr edd hogidaaabidegbes s 2 6 Energy Saver Function 00 cece et eee teen ee tenes 2 7 Switching the Language for Display Language 00 0 c eee ete eee 2 9 Setting Date and Time 1 6 tee eee eens 2 11 Network Setup LAN Cable Connection 0 000 eee 2 14 Installing Software cbc ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 2 16 Command Center RX sores karanana a a eee eee ee eb eee babe eee ee ebb eee 2 29 Preparation for sending a document toa PC 000 eee 2 37 Loading Papefins ci deebandeiadieiayecdade a tae baneia nde bad Ee 2 46 Loading Originals sszci cia c28 gee cee ha aiaie a args haieigine aece ke aig a ea eke alg Hace e arate a 2 59 3 Basic Operation LOgIN LOGOU see rea sereia raa
207. e Is it in good condition Remove the paper turn it over and reload it Is the paper curled folded or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine Remove any jammed paper Printouts are wrinkled or curled Is the paper damp Replace the paper with new paper Cannot print Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet Is the machine powered on Turn on the power switch Is the printer cable connected Connect the correct printer cable securely Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable Is the print job paused Press Resume the Left Select key to resume printing Is the error message displayed Follow the corresponding procedure Documents are printed improperly Are the application software settings at the PC set properly Check that the printing system driver and application software settings are set properly 10 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Cannot print with USB memory Check Points Is the USB host blocked Corrective Actions Select Unblock in the USB host settings Reference Page Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC an image size is shrunk vertic
208. e amount of water If coughing develops contact a physician e If you do happen to ingest toner rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach If necessary contact a physician e If you do happen to get toner in your eyes flush them thoroughly with water If there is any remaining tenderness contact a physician e If toner does happen to get on your skin wash with soap and water Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner S xvii Other precautions Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose MP Tray return it to its original package and reseal it If using the machine with the FAX function installed and the power switch is off transmitting receiving Fax is disabled Do not turn off the power switch xviii Laser Safety Europe Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body For this reason laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetical
209. e can be set The range that can be set is as follows For Europe 30 ppm model 1 to 60 minutes 1minute increments 35 ppm model 1 to 120 minutes 1minute increments Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes 1minute increments Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Timer The default setting is 1 minute Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings lol Language fault Screen Sound De Exit lt gt wi Login User Name Login Password Login Timer Setting ol Auto Panel Reset PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit lt gt wi 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 4 The Timer Settings menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Low Power Timer 8 35 Default Setting System Menu Low Power Timer 1 240 Sleep Rules models for Europe Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings Default Screen Sound
210. e cassette 4 Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required If you are going to use paper that is longer than A4 pull out the extension paper cassette by pushing the release lever one by one and adjust it to the desired paper size 2 48 Preparation before Use 5 Load the paper in the cassette Ensure the side to be printed is facing down and the paper is not folded curled or damaged ai IMPORTANT Do not load paper above the triangle mark located on the width guide e Before loading the paper be sure that it is not curled or folded Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator see illustration below e When loading the paper keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up e The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams e Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper If there is a gap readjust the guides to fit the paper 6 Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the machine Push it straight in as far as it will go There is a paper ga
211. e copy paper sizes of Folio A4 A5 B5 Legal Oficio Il Letter Statement 16K and 216 x 340 mm 2 in 1 Mode For copying two originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet The following 2 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 9 Copying Functions 4 in 1 Mode For copying four originals onto a single sheet This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet The following 4 in 1 options and output orientations are available Original Orientation of Original Platen Document processor NOTE When placing the original on the platen be sure to copy the originals in page order 4 10 Copying Functions Types of Page Boundary Lines The following types of the boundary lines are availabl
212. e period of time a job retention file can be saved When a file has been saved for longer than the period it is automatically deleted Quick Copy Jobs The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below Sys Menu Count Send FAX Exit Document Box 0m Job Box Select Key Set Exit Job Box Ka oK Quick Copy Jobs JobRet Deletion Exit Quick Copy Jobs 0 50 EHE s 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Document Box 2 Press the OK key The Document Box menu appears Press the A or V key to select Job Box 4 Press the OK key The Job Box screen appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Quick Copy Jobs 6 Press the OK key The Quick Copy Jobs screen appears 7 Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be saved with the numeric keys 8 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Job Box screen 8 107 Default Setting System Menu Job Retention Deletion The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below Sys Menu Count Send FAX Exit Document Box lt 0m Job Box Select Key Set Exit Job Box O Quick Copy Jobs JobRet Deletion Exit JobRet Deletion lt 1 hour 4 hours 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V
213. e protocol to be used for HTTP The default setting is HTTPS only Use the procedure below to make the setting Sys Menu Count Report Counter Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key 8 157 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt lol Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting 05 Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface Exit Secure Protocol gt SSL IPP Security HTTP Security Exit HTTP Security lt m HTTP HTTPS OJ HTTPS onl 10 A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Press the A or V key to select HTTP Security Press the OK key HTTP Security appears Press the A or V key to select HTTP HTTPS or HTTPS only Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu 8 158 Default Setting System Menu L
214. e reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On Low NOTE Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters It is recommended to keep the default Off Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Adjust Maint Document Box 4 Edit Destination Exit 8 119 Default Setting System Menu Adjust Send Back Maint Box grnd gt OK lol Copy Denst Adj Density Density Exit On L On H Correct ow igh Bk Line gt Mm lo Oft New Developer Press the OK key The Adjust Maint menu appears Press the A or V key to select Correct Bk Line Press the OK key Correct Bk Line appears Press the A or V key to select Off On Low or On High Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust Maint menu When the printing is too light or incomplete even though there is enough toner refresh the developer Sys Me o Edit Document nu Count Box Destination 0J Adjust Maint Exit lt gt wi Adjust Send Backgrnd Maint BOXx Density Exit So 0K lol Copy Denst Adj Density Service
215. ears 11 Enter the login password You have to enter the password of the account on the destination PC 12 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears NOTE If the screen for confirming the entry of a new destination page 8 107 is set to On screens to confirm the entered host name and path name appear Enter the same host name and path name again and press the OK key on their respective screens 3 22 Basic Operation Data to be entered are as follows NOTE You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password of the destination PC Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password For send to folder SMB Host Name SMB Data to be entered Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data Max characters Up to 64 characters Path Share name For example scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder share name folder name in shared folder Up to 128 characters Login User Name User name to access the PC For example abcdnet james smith Up to 64 characters Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64 characters To specify a port number different from the default 445 enter using the format host name port number e g SMBhostname 140 For send to folder FTP Host Name FTP Data to be entered Host name or IP address of FTP server Ma
216. ect Scanned Pages press the lt or gt key to switch the counted items If the number of output sheets is restricted by an account management function the upper limit on the number of output sheets is also displayed 11 After confirming the content press the OK key The screen returns to the menu for the account 12 To reset the counter press the A or V key to select Counter Reset 13 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears 14 Press Yes the Left Select key The counter is reset Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the menu for the account 11 35 Management Printing an Accounting Report Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered When Split is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Count ACCOUNT REPORT MFP Firmware Version For the count by paper size the report will be printed by size Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter Sys Menu Count gt 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and MEE p
217. ect Speed Priority The table below lists the available settings and their details Item Description Adj PrintDirect Adjust print direction Print speed is a little slower Select this item to print on Prepunched Preprint and Letterhead Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation Select this item when paper orientation is not important If you select Adj PrintDirect load paper according to the steps below Example copying on Letterhead Original Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray Original Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray NOTE When loading cover paper in a multi purpose tray load the face on which printing is supposed to be done upward When loading cover paper in a cassette load the face on which printing is supposed to be done down 8 21 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se Def Sound ttings gt m lol Language ault Screen Exit Orig Paper Set m Def Custom PaperSize Orig Size Exit SpcialPaper Act 0 Adj Print W Speed Priority Direct 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Pr
218. ect key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears 8 System Network lt lol Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Optional Network Press the OK key The Optional Network screen Optional Network gt appears Basic Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Basic 6 Press the OK key The Basic menu screen appears Basic gt lol Host Name TCP IP Settings Bonjour Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select LAN Interface 8 169 Default Setting System Menu LAN Interface gt oK 10Base Half 10Base Full Exit Restart Network 8 9 10 Press the OK key The LAN Interface screen appears Press the A or V key to select the desired LAN Interface The available LAN Interface are as follows Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000Base T Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu After all network related settings have been done restart the network card of the device This is mandatory to make the settings effective Sys Menu Count Report Counter Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level
219. ection 5 6 A LAN Cable 2 5 Power Cable 2 5 USB Cable 2 5 Connection Method 2 3 Continuous Scan Accessibility Appendix 23 Adjusting Density 5 11 Adjustment Maintenance 8 116 Backgrnd Density 8 117 Copy Density Adjustment 8 116 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8 119 Developer Refresh 8 120 DP Adjustment 8 121 Print Density 8 118 Send Box Density 8 117 Auto Paper Selection Appendix 23 B Copy 4 13 Send 5 14 Conventions in This Guide xxviii Copy Bonjour Appendix 23 Bundled Items 2 2 Buzzer 8 6 C Adjusting Density 3 8 Backgrnd Density 4 19 Collate Copying 3 15 Duplex Copying 3 12 Offset Copying 3 15 Originals 4 2 Selecting Image Quality 3 9 Setup 8 79 Sharpness 4 18 Zoom Copying 3 10 Copy Settings 8 79 Auto Paper Selection 8 80 8 81 Paper Selection 8 79 Quick Setup Registration 8 82 Copying Functions 4 1 Counting the Number of Pages Cassette Loading Paper 2 47 Paper Size and Media Type 8 12 Changing Language 2 9 8 3 Cleaning Separator 9 5 Slit Glass 9 3 Color Color Grayscale Black and White Selection 5 13 Color mode Color Selection Copy 8 45 Combine Mode 2 in 1 Mode 4 9 4 in 1 Mode 4 10 Page Boundary Lines 4 11 Command Center RX 2 29 Connecting Printed 11 32 Counting the Number of Pages Printed D Each Job 11 34 Printing a Report 11 36 Total Job 11 32 Date Timer 8 27 Auto Panel Reset 8 40 Date Format 8 29 Date Time 8 27 Low Power Timer 8 35
220. ed in user can be viewed Hide All Only users with administrator privileges can view the job log FAX Log Select the method of displaying the FAX Log Item Description Show All All users can view the FAX Log Hide All Only users with administrator privileges can view the FAX Log Use the procedure below to specify the settings for Disp Status Log The setting procedure is explained using jobs detail status as an example 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 8 76 Default Setting System Menu 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Disp Status Log 4 Press the OK key The Disp Status Log menu appears Disp Status Log gt lol JobsDetailStatus Jobs Log FAX Log Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select JobsDetailStatus 6 Press the OK key JobsDetailStatus appears JobsDetailStatus 0m 0 My Jobs Only Hide Al 7 Press the A or V key to select the method of displaying the jobs detail status screen 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Disp Status Log menu 8 77 Default Setting System Menu Toner
221. eight 44 to 74 g m Basis weight 104 to 151 g m overall paper weight Top sheet thickness 0 086 to 0 107 mm Overall paper thickness 0 115 to 0 145 mm Moisture content 4 to 6 composite Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix In addition the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing up to 200 C or 392 F Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 9 of the Appendix The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing It must be resistant to silicone oil as well Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix however its whiteness may be considered separately NOTE Before purchasing recycled paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality Appendix 17 Specifications NOTE Specifications are subject to change without notice Common functions Item Description Type Desktop Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser single drum system Image Write System Semiconductor laser 1 beam Paper Weight Front Cassette 60 to 120 g m Duplex 60 to 105 g m MP Tray 60 to 220 g m Paper Type Front Cassette Plain Rough
222. elected notice destination If you select Address Entry enter the address of the notice destination NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 10 Press the Start key to start copying Upon completion of the job an E mail notice is sent to the selected destination NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 15 Copying Functions File Name Entry Names a copy job Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary You can check a job history or job status using the job name date and time or job number specified here Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sma OK Collate O Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select File Name Entry 5 Press the OK key File Name Entry appears File Name Entry 0 dock Text 6 Enter the file name press the OK key Additional Info appears NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 7 Enter the date job number etc on the screen and then press the OK key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for
223. em Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt WSD SCAN WSD PRINT WSD SCAN bmg OK Off 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select WSD SCAN 6 Press the OK key The WSD SCAN menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Network Settings menu 8 149 Default Setting System Menu WSD Print Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Print The default setting is On Use the procedure below to setup the WSD PRINT setting The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed Sys Menu Count Report Counter Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt WSD SCAN WSD PRINT
224. en will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and ea e i press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set User Job Account gt User Login Set Unknown ID Job Exit 11 21 Management Job Account Set m m 01 Job Accounting AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Account List 0m amp eUI R amp D DEP SeGUI Design SeRD Center Menu Account List 0m SUI R amp D DEP eeGUI Design RD Center Menu Detail lt OK Account Name 1 6 GUI Design Edit Overwrite Are you sure eGUI DESIGN Yes I No 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Account List 7 Press the OK key Account List appears The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing account information 1 Press the A or V key to select the account whose information you want to change and then press the OK key Press the lt or gt key to select the item you want to change press Edit the Right Select key change account information and restriction of use and then press the OK key NOTE Activa
225. ens Cera A ZZ 2 E 6 Select the entered user select the Change and Read permissions and click the OK button Share Permissions Group or user names In Windows XP go to step 8 amp Everyone amp PC4050 PC4050 james smith Pemissions for james smith Allow Deny Full Control Change 7 Read v Leam about access control and permissions NOTE Everyone gives sharing permission to everyone on the network To strengthen security it is recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark 7 Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing screen to close the screen 2 40 Preparation before Use r scannerdata Properties s General Shari Previous Versions Customize Object name C scannerdata Group or user names SYSTEM PC0391 PC4050 james smith R Administrators PC4050 Administrators Pemnissions for SYSTEM Allow To change permissions click Edit C Deny Full control Modify Read amp execute List folder contents Read Write click Advanced Leam about access control and permissions For special permissions or advanced settings Apply fa J Permissions for scannerdata gt Security Object name C scannerdata Group or us
226. entering characters Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 15 Sending Functions Subject and Body Entry When sending E mail enter the subject and body of the E mail Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E mail message and then send the E mail NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu paid OK 01 Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image m Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Subject Body f Press the OK key Subject Entry appears Subject Entry 0 E ABC Text 6 Enter the subject and press the OK key NOTE Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject 7 Enter the body and press the OK key Body Entry A oK E NOTE Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body ABC Text Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 8 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 16 Sending
227. enu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit f A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select NW InterfaceSend Press the OK key The NW InterfaceSend screen NW InterfaceSend gt appears OH Standard Option NIC Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select the desired NIC Standard standard network interface Option NIC optional network interface kit 6 Press the OK key The NIC is set and the Basic menu reappears 8 172 Default Setting System Menu Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces The following interface block settings are available e USB Host USB memory slot setting e USB Device USB interface setting e USB Storage USB storage setting e Optional interface Optional interface card setting USB Host USB memory slot setting This locks and protects the USB memory slot A1 or USB port A2 USB host The default setting is Unblock
228. environmental conditions are as follows e Temperature 50 to 90 5 F 10 to 32 5 C e Humidity 15 to 80 However adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine e Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight e Avoid locations with vibrations e Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations e Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air e Avoid poorly ventilated locations If the floor is delicate against casters when this machine is moved after installation the floor material may be damaged During copying some ozone is released but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one s health If however the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies the smell may become unpleasant To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated Cautions when handling consumables caution Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner Dangerous sparks may cause burns S Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children S If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner avoid inhalation and ingestion as well as contact S with your eyes and skin If you do happen to inhale toner move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a larg
229. er 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select Override A4 LTR 4 Press the OK key Override A4 LTR appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 88 Default Setting System Menu Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode The table below shows the available settings Description Finish Off No duplex mode Bind Long Longer edge Edge bound Bind Short Shorter edge Edge bound Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer O Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Duplex 4 Press the OK key Duplex appears Duplex lt ol Oft Bind Long Edge Bind Short Edge 5 Press the A or V key to select Off Bind Long Edge or Bind Short Edge 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 89 Default Setting System Menu Copies Set the default number of copies from 1 to 999 Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count me
230. er Common Settings Copy Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt gt m ol Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select User Name Press the OK key User Name appears User Name Kma ox Off Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 95 Default Setting System Menu MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the paper feed Item Description Off The printer driver settings are followed Auto Feed If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray Always If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver Use the procedure below to set MP Tray Priority 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit 3 Press A or V to select MP Tray Priority MP T Priority m a cee a 4 Press the OK key The MP Tray Priority screen appears Auto Feed Always
231. er Is there any cover which is open Close the cover indicated on the operation panel Error occurred Turn the power switch off and on System error has occurred Turn the power switch off and on 10 6 Troubleshooting Error Message Failed to store job retention data Job is canceled Check Points Is there insufficient space available on the RAM disk Corrective Actions Printing using the Job Box function failed because there was insufficient space available on the RAM disk Change the size of RAM disk with the numeric keys Reference Page File is not found Job is canceled The specified file is not found The job is canceled Press the OK key Incorrect account ID The Account ID does not match Check the registered Account ID Incorrect account ID Job is canceled This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press the OK key Incorrect ID Is the user ID entered for private job correct The user ID entered for a private job is not correct Check the user ID that you specified on the printer driver Incorrect Login User Name or Password Job Is canceled Inner Tray is full of Paper Remove the paper Enter correct login user name or password Remove paper from the inner tray and press the OK key to resume the job Insufficient memory Cannot start the job Further scanning cannot be performed due to i
232. er does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper a Specifications shown below such as moisture or pulp content For this reason we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications Appendix 1 1 Choosing the Appropriate Paper This section describes guidelines for choosing paper Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled dirty or torn Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint or that is especially delicate Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine Choose paper with a smooth and even surface however avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80 pulp i e not more than 20 of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes i
233. er names amp amp SYSTEM james smith PC4050 james smith R Administrators PC4050 Administrators Add Remove Pemissions for james smith Allow Deny Full control ey E Modify m i List folder contents Read X Leam about access control and permissions 8 Click the Security tab and then click the Edit button In Windows XP click the Security tab and then click the Add button 9 Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user to Group or user names 10 Select the added user select the Modify and Read amp execute permissions and then click the OK button 2 41 Preparation before Use Configuring Windows Firewall for Windows 7 Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission NOTE Log on to Windows with administrator privileges Checking file and printer sharing Seed gt gt Control Panel System and Security Control Panel Home Y Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Cont System and Security Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier Network and Interet Hardware and Sound Pg Windows Firewall Check firewall status Allow 2 program through Windows Firewall Programs User Accounts and Family System Safety z View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the
234. eration panel is pressed The machine also automatically recovers and prints when a job is detected If print data is received during Sleep the print job is performed while the message display remains unlit To use the machine press any key on the operation panel For more information about configuring settings refer to Sleep Level models except for Europe on page 8 37 Energy Saver Mode models except for Europe This mode reduces power consumption even more than quick recovery mode and allows Sleep mode to be set separately for each function To use the machine press any key on the operation panel The machine will be ready to use within 15 seconds Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly For more information on Energy Saver settings refer to Sleep Level models except for Europe on page 8 37 2 7 Preparation before Use Sleep Rules models for Europe You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function When the machine enters sleep mode it takes longer for the machine to wake and return to normal operation For more information on Sleep Rules settings refer to Sleep Rules models for Europe on page 8 36 In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time CAUTION If this machine will be left unused for an extended period e g overnight turn it off at the power switch If the machine will not be used for an even longer p
235. eriod of time e g vacation remove the power A plug from the outlet as a safety precaution If using the machine with the fax function note that turning the machine off at the power switch disables fax transmission and reception CAUTION Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity 2 8 Preparation before Use Switching the Language for Display Language Select the language displayed on the Message Display Use the procedure below to select the language 1 Press the Power switch 2 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel System Menu Counter 2 Login User Name 0 not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the When you are performing user management and have user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE The following administrator is registered in the Login machine at the factory Login User Name 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Login Password 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters eo S C 3 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings 4 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lt m Language Default Screen Sound Exit 5
236. erns appear edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward Blur The setting items are as follows _ ef o e 1 to 3 Sharpen Emphasizes the image outline 1 to 3 Unsharpen Blurs the image outline Can weaken a Moire effect Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots The procedure for adjusting the sharpness of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Km OK Collate O Duplex Oo Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Sharpness meo eae Press the OK key Sharpness appears Sharpness Kma oK 1 1 6 Press the A or V key to select 3 Unsharpen to 3 Sharpen 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 Press the Start key Copying begins NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 18 Copying Functions Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals such as newspapers If the ground color is obtrusive select Auto If Auto does not remove the ground color select Manual and adjust the density of the ground color The setting items are as follows Item Description Does not adjust the ground color Automatically adjusts the background density based on the orig
237. eseans 5 10 WSD Slaen oP a e Job Finish Notice 5 1 Sending Functions Original Size Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning Be sure to select the original size before starting the sending process Choose the original size from the following groups of original size Original Letter Legal Statement Executive Officio Il A4 A5 A6 Sizes B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8 7 Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu paid OK Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Original Size Press the OK key Original Size appears Original Size Sma OK Legal 4 Statement 4 6 Press the A or V key to select the desired original size and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 7 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 2
238. ess the A or V key to select Orig Orientation Press the OK key Orig Orientation appears Press the A or V key to select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 7 Copying Functions EcoPrint Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu bmg OK Collate O Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select EcoPrint m 5 Press the OK key EcoPrint appears EcoPrint Km OK On 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 7 Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 8 Copying Functions Combine Mode This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page 2 in 1 mode or 4 in 1 mode The page boundary of each original can be indicated NOTE Combine mode is available for th
239. ess the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select SpcialPaper Act 6 Press the OK key SpcialPaper Act appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Adj PrintDirect or Speed Priority 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Orig Paper Set menu 8 22 Default Setting System Menu Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time Options are 1 999 copies Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Preset Limit qe 4 Press the OK key The Preset Limit menu appears Preset Limit 0 1 999 MBM copies 5 Press the A or V key to enter the number of copies 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 23 Default Setting System Menu Switching Unit of Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions Use the procedure below to change the
240. essary to register the sender and destination recipient address on the network A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required It is recommended that a Local Area Network LAN be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues At the same time as you send a scanned image you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps e Program the settings including the E mail setting on the machine e Use Command Center RX the internal HTML web page to register the IP address the host name of the SMTP server and the recipient e Register the destination in the Address Book or One touch keys When the PC Folder SMB FTP is selected it is necessary to share the destination folder For setting up the PC Folder contact your administrator e Detailed transmission settings to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time Follow the steps below for basic sending The following four options are available e Send as E mail Sends a scanned original image as an E mail attachment page 3 19 Send to Folder SMB Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC page 3 21 e Send to Folder FTP Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server page 3 21 e Image Data Scanning with TWAIN WIA Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application
241. et menu appears Press the A or V key to select Default Setting Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Counter Limit Press the OK key Counter Limit appears Press the A or V key to select the item for which you want to set the default restriction on the number of sheets and then press the OK key 11 30 Management Copy Restriction 1 9999999 123456 11 Use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to Counter Limit 12 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions on the number of sheets 11 31 Management Counting the Number of Pages Printed This counts the number of pages printed Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time Types of the counts are as follows Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed and the total number of pages used You can also use Duplex Pages and Combine Pages to check the number of pages used Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying faxing and other functions as well as the total number of pages scanned FAX TX Pages Displays the number of pages faxed FAX TX Time Displa
242. etwork Settings gt Source Size Type Capacity Status Cassette 1 A4 f_ Plain 250 No Paper 0 Security Settings gt ee os em ER 1 x NOTE The configurable settings within Device Security Send Security and Network Security can also be configured from the machine s System Menu For details see Default Setting System Menu on page 8 1 For details on settings related to certificates refer to the Command Center RX User Guide 2 31 Preparation before Use Changing Device Information Change the device information of the machine 1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on 2 30 2 From the Device Settings menu select System KYOCERA Model Command Center EX an A lt Last Updated m Home Device Settings System 2013 08 23 13 38 05 Q Admin Device Information Host Name NMAE9F75 Asset Number Device Information gt Location Job Status gt General gt RAM Disk Mode On Off RAM Disk Size MB 1 32 Override A4 Letter On Paper Feed Output Original Document Energy Saver Timer Preset Limit 999 copies 1 999 Measurement mm Default Screen Copy Default Screen Send FAX Destination Language English z 3 Enter the device information and then click Submit IMPORTANT After changing the setting restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON To restart the networ
243. ey to move the cursor position press the A or V key to enter year month and day and then press the OK key 2 12 Preparation before Use Date Time bmg OK Hour Min Second 11 45 Time Zone Greenwich lt gt w Date Setting Date Time Time Zone Exit om Date Format Month Day Year Year Month Day Exit 16 17 18 19 Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position press the A or V key to enter hours minutes and seconds and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu Press the A or V key to select Date Format Press the OK key Date Format appears Press the A or V key to select the desired display format and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu 2 13 Preparation before Use Network Setup LAN Cable Connection The machine is equipped with network interface which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 NetBEUI and IPSec It enables network printing on the Windows Macintosh UNIX and other platforms The table below shows the items required for each of the settings Configure the printer s network parameters as appropriate for your PC and your network environment For details of the procedure refer to the Network Setup on page 8 136 or Network Security on
244. ferred to as Low Power Mode If print data is received during Low Power Mode the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode on products with the FAX function installed the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing To use the machine press any key on the operation panel The machine will be ready to use within 1 second Note that ambient environmental conditions such as ventilation may cause the machine to respond more slowly For information on the Low Power Mode settings refer to Low Power Timer on page 8 35 NOTE When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode Sleep When the set time factory setting is 1 minute elapses after the machine is last used the machine automatically enters sleep mode The message display backlight and lights turn off to minimize power consumption This status is referred to as Sleep When in the Sleep state Sleeping appears in the message display There are two sleep modes models except for Europe Quick Recovery and Energy Saver The default setting is Energy Saver mode NOTE When a preset time of Low Power Timer and Sleep Timer is same Sleep Mode overrides Low Power Mode Quick Recovery Mode models except for Europe The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode The machine recovers quickly when any key on the op
245. for the binding edge of the finished copies 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting pata OK 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Finish Binding 8 68 Default Setting System Menu 8 Press the OK key Finish Binding appears Finish Binding gt 01 ld Left Right Hi Top 9 Press the A or V key to select HWA Left Right or H Top 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 69 Default Setting System Menu Image Quality Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Detai
246. from 0 9 tage Send previous page PARO Collate Orig Orientation Backgrnd Copy Backgrnd Send EcoPrint File Name Entry Sub ject Body Con scan ExptFAX Con scan FAX File Format File Separation JPEG TIFF Print XPS FitTo Page Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout 4 ane nay out Border Line Ong Sine ng Panis Binding Image Quality Collon WNT Comp PDF A Login Operation RAM Disk Mode Optional Memory Disp Status Log Woingremikerce there Copy Paper Selection AutoPaperSelect POUCOS E Pier oiewicyy Select Key Set page 8 47 page 8 48 page 8 49 page 8 50 page 8 51 page 8 52 page 8 53 page 8 54 page 8 55 page 8 57 page 8 58 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 8 59 page 8 60 page 8 61 page 8 62 page 8 63 page 8 64 page 8 65 page 8 66 page 8 68 page 8 70 page 8 71 page 8 72 page 8 73 page 8 74 page 8 75 page 8 76 page 8 78 page 8 79 page 8 80 page 8 81 page 8 82 XIV System Menu Counter key Continued from previous page Continued on next page Printer Emulation Set ACO Te Line Override A4 LTR Duplex Copies Orientation FormFeed TimeOut LF Action CR Action Job Name User Na
247. functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a program Then you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just pressing one of the Program 1 to 4 keys NOTE The following functions are already registerd in Program 1 key This function allows you to copy the front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Stetement or A5 size onto a single page Although the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key you can register the same settings using the Function Menu key Combine 2 in 1 Continuous Scan On Original Size Statement Inch models A5 Metric models Paper Selection Cassette 1 Zoom Options Auto Zoom 3 3 Basic Operation Program Registering Settings Registered Program 1 Changing and Deleting Settings Program 1 Yes J Are you sure Menu Sma OK Overwrite Delete Overwrite Delete Program 1 Yes i Are you sure Recalling Settings ID Card Copy is printed on the Program 1 key When the functions are deleted by overwriting Program 1 key seal the label supplied with the machine and write the function name in it After making settings press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the settings for 3 seconds The current settings are registered to the selected program key
248. g Sys Menu Count Report Counter System Network Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login System Network lt Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt WSD SCAN WSD PRINT TCP IP Settings lt m IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 6 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select TCP IP 8 142 Default Setting System Menu TCP IP bmg OK On TCP IP Settings m TCP IP IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit IPv4 Setting pata OK Auto IP IP Address Exit DHCP pata OK Off 8 Press the OK key TCP IP appears 9 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu
249. g operations e User Login Administration 0 cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 2 Job ACCOUN Grainne 1128 e Checking the Countet cceee R RE 11 38 11 1 Management User Login Administration User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in Access are in three levels User Administrator and Machine Administrator The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator First User Login Administration Follow these steps for the first user login administration Enable user login administration page 11 2 v Add a user page 11 6 v Log out page 11 5 v The registered user logs in for operations page 11 5 Enabling Disabling User Login Administration This enables user login administration Select one of the following authentication methods Local User authentication based on user properties on Authentication the local user list stored in the machine Network User authentication based on Authentication Authentication Server Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page Management Use the procedure below to enable user login administration NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit S
250. g the Use of the Machine This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 23 Restriction Items Split selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Limits the number of sheets used for copying Copier Print Restriction Limits the number of sheets used for printing Printer Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes Others copying and sending fax Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax Only on Restriction products with the FAX function installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing Scan Restriction Limits the number of sheets scanned excludes Others copying Fax TX Limits the number of sheets sent by fax Only on Restriction products with the FAX function installed 11 25 Management Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows Item Description Off No restriction given Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies Reject Usage Use the procedure below to select a restriction method
251. g the paper back into the tray Loading Envelopes 1 envelope may be loaded in the multi purpose tray Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm Executive 7 1 4 x 10 1 2 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 2 51 Preparation before Use 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops 2 Pull out the subtray 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray For standard paper sizes slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go 2 52 Preparation before Use 5 For landscape form envelopes close the flap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing towards you For portrait form envelopes close the f
252. gnore CR 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed Use the procedure below to specify a Job Name 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count M select Printer Common Settings CoPy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt m ol Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Job Name 4 Press the OK key Job Name appears Job Name lt ol Oft 02 On 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 94 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key When On is selected a screen appears for you to set the job name to be used When Off is selected Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer screen 7 7 Press the A or V key to select Job Name Job Additional Info lt No Job Name or Job Name Job No 01i Job Name Job No Job Name Job Name Job No 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed Gq Use the procedure below to specify the User Name setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt M select Print
253. hare name scannerdata Add Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to 20 Comments _ Permissions caching _ ox _ cancet ay _ Ei J Permissions for scannerdata ES Share Permissions Group or user names E T Everyone Add Remove Pemissions for Everyone Allow Deny Full Control Change m m Read v Leam about access control and permissions r hl Advanced Sharing Create a folder on the local disk C NOTE For example create a folder with the name 2 scannerdata on the local disk C Right click the scannerdata folder and click Share and Advanced sharing Click the Advanced Sharing button The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears In Windows XP right click the scannerdata folder and select Sharing and Security or Sharing Select the Share this folder checkbox and click the Permissions button The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box appears In Windows XP select Share this folder and click the Permissions button 4 Click the Add button 2 39 Preparation before Use r 5 Enter the user name which you confirmed on Checking el sers or Groups 2 Felet Mees or CER what to enter for Login User Name on 2 37 in the text Select this object type F SER E box and click the OK button From this location PC4050 Enter the object names to select examples Teac
254. he document box and USB memory Displays the Send screen where you can send an e mail Displays the FAX screen where you can send a FAX Selects the menu displayed at the lower left in the Message Display Blinks while print data is being received or data is transmitted Used to register call and delete destinations to the one touch key numbers 1 to 22 Shifts to switch the one touch key numbers 1 to 11 and 12 to 22 Lamp is lit while shifted 12 to 22 Blinks while the machine is accessing the memory FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed 1 2 Part Names Used to select a menu item move the cursor when Clears entered numbers and characters entering characters change a value etc Resets settings and displays the basic screen Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered value Displays the function menu for copy print transmission and document box Clear Reset Program LL ID Card Copy lt 3 Ke OO Function Menu ai Back Attention Numeric keys Enter Ends operation numbers and symbols logs out on the Administration screen Returns the Message Display to the Used to register or recall previous screen programs Lights or blinks when an error occurs Cancels the printing job in progress Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations
255. he machine as an E mail attachment E mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A protocol for E mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers Appendix 24 Status Page The page lists machine conditions such as the memory capacity total number of prints and scans and paper source settings Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0 The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address The term prefix refers to something added to the beginning and in this context indicates the first section of the IP address When an IP address is written the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash For example 24 in the address 133 210 2 0 24 In this way 133 210 2 0 24 denotes the IP address 133 210 2 0 with a 24 bit prefix network section This new network address section originally part of the host address made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address When you enter the subnet mask be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCPIIP is a suite of proto
256. he table below shows the available settings Item Description Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals Def PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper Source refer to page 8 20 Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection E 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Copy System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit eS 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Copy lt gt m AutoPaperSelect Auto Priority L Exit Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection 4 Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Paper Selection V Def PaperSource 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto or Def Paper Source 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 79 Default Setting System Menu Auto Paper Selection If Auto is selected for Paper Selection set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes The table below shows the available settings Item Description MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the original regardless the zoom Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection System Network User J
257. ial without permission of the copyright owner e Copying Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low It may not be limited to these items Do not knowingly copy scan the items that are not to be copied scanned Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate e Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying scanning of other items not mentioned above XIX XX Legal and Safety Information Please read this information before using your machine This chapter provides information on the following topics Ld Informationen Xxil eo ae panies PE E PEE xxii e Aitomatie 2 Sided pe Function ETT re i l e Papar Recycling pian enemy 2 e resi oe r ENERGY STAR Pane sores a ee Coneniati in i This Guide EAEE SASAE ENSEST xxviii xxi Legal Information Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Document Solutions Inc is prohibited Regarding Trade Names PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and or other countries PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Adobe Acrobat Adobe Reader a
258. ide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 5 11 page 5 6 page 5 21 page 5 22 page 5 23 page 5 24 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Job Box page 6 8 USB Memory page 6 2 Document Box key Function Menu key Collate page 3 15 Nile ha Sem Paper Selection page 4 3 Duplex page 3 12 EcoPrint page 4 8 File Name Entry page 5 15 JobFinish Notice page 4 14 Print Override page 4 17 Encrypted PDF JPEG TIFF Print page 6 3 XPS FitTo Page page 6 4 Document Box key When saving to USB memory Function Menu key Color Selection Original Size Original Image Scan Resolution Storing Size Zoom Orig Orientation Continuous Scan File Format File Name Entry JobFinish Notice Density Duplex Sharpness Status Job Cancel key Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status Scheduled Job Print Job Log Send Job Log Store Job Log Scanner Printer FAX Toner Status Paper Status USB Memory Backgrnd Density page 7 2 page 7 2 page 7 2 page 7 8 page 7 8 page 7 8 page 7 8 page 7 20 page 7 20 page 7 20 page 3 29 page 3 29 page 7 21 page 5 13 page 5 2 page 5 10 page 5 12
259. ification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off Restore defaults m iv Home or work private networks Sl Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devic Troubleshoot my network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections te IMP Windows Firewall with Avene Sey eas Femenina J piei BP Hors enat nin Adverad Securty provides reve see for Wen compas ENR impot oier IE Montoring amp Spor Potcy Sverre Z estore Detaut otcy Domain Profite Diagnose Mepit Windows Fronds on bound ccnnecton that do net matcha nute are blocked ora outbound connections that do not match a nie ae alowed E Properties Private Profile is Active Help WG Windows Firewall with Advanced Security File Action View Help es AA B Windows Firewall with Advan Inbound Rules E Outbound Rules le Connection Security Rules E Monitoring Tabound Rules Group Profle Enabled trench Cache Content Retrievai HTTF In BranchCache Content Ret All erancncache Hosted Cache Server HTT SranchCeche Hosted Cech All yanch Cacha Peer Discovery WSD In BranchCache Peer Disceve AN connect toa Network Projector TCP n Connect toa Network Proje Privates connect toa Network Projector TCP In Cannect toa Network Proje Demain 7 7 T Fiter by State Y Fiter by Group SREEFETEEEE
260. ill appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings 8 147 Default Setting System Menu TCP IP Settings lt m IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting go A lt gt 2l TCP I ol Off 02 On TCP IP Settings m IPv4 Setting IPv6 Setting Exit 10 11 12 Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Press the OK key TCP IP appears Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu Press the A or V key to select Bonjour Press the OK key Bonjour appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the TCP IP Settings menu 8 148 Default Setting System Menu WSD Scan Setup Select whether or not to use WSD Scan The default setting is On Use the procedure below to setup the WSD SCAN setting The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed Sys Menu Count Report Counter Syst
261. inal Manually adjust the density in 5 levels When Manual is selected press 1 Lighter to 5 Darker to adjust the background density The procedure for adjusting the background density of copies is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu Sma OK Collate O Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Backgrnd Density Press the OK key Backgrnd Density appears Backgrnd Density gt Auto Manual 6 Press the A or V key to select Off Auto or Manual 7 Press the OK key Manual Sma OK 3 When Manual is selected Manual appears Press the 4 Aor V key to select 1 Lighter to 5 Darker and then 0 5 Darker press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 Press the Start key Copying begins NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 19 Copying Functions 4 20 5 Sending Functions This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals e Original coc 55d ascot caontinche asada sechioehuaasestadeendesaoaannes 5 2 e Sending OZE renna ao COC ccs ee eee ere nme AEA 5 5 gt COGN Al COVA sssctecteee cece stats deapectesetdnasecctentiectened 5 7 PG PORTAL irissen e e Original IMage ose caiesecwscieeciaient soscsaicetaneresmoseteseuecre
262. ination lt 0 Address Entry and then press the OK key Address Book Address Entry 8 Ifyou select Address Book select Address Book on Address Book paid OK the next screen and press the OK key and then select the notice destination MMaury Press Menu the Right Select key select Detail on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the selected notice destination MMorgan Menu If you select Address Entry enter the address of the Address Entry 0 notice destination k abcdefg jpili NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for ABC details on entering characters Text 9 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending 5 19 Sending Functions 10 Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending When the sending is completed the finish notice is sent to the specified E mail address NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 20 Sending Functions FTP Encrypted TX This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them If you select On in this option you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the
263. ination Address Book Adding Start up One Touch Keys 8 122 the application Place the originals on the platen Saving Documents Sending 3 18 1 to USB Memory Operation Sending Functions 5 1 Scan to USB 6 5 1 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send by entering the address directly vi Administrator tasks To send a FAX FAX functions available only on products with the FAX function installed S As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines you can also send a FAX via a network A It faxes NOTE For more information on setting up and sending a FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide FAX directly Send a FAX froma computer Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine Selection of Telephone Line Inch version only Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer 1 Place the originals on the platen FAX Operation Basic 3 1 on the FAX Operation Guide About Network FAX 7 1 on the FAX Operation Guide Operation 1 For more information refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide 2 If the destination is not stored in the address book you can send the FAX by entering the address directly vii Menu Map Copy key Function Menu key Paper Selection Collate Duplex Zoom Combine Original
264. ing and press the OK key 5 A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE The following administrator is registered in the machine at the factory Login User Name 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Login Password 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 6 The Date Setting menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Time Zone 2 11 Preparation before Use Time Zone O GMT Casablanca 35 GMT Greenwich 82 01 00 Amsterdam om Date Setting Date Format Time Zone Summer Time Exit Summer Time bmg OK lol Oft 02 On Date Setting pata OK Date Format Time Zone Exit Date Time pata OK Year Month Day 2011 01 Time Zone Greenwich 10 11 12 13 14 15 Press the OK key Time Zone appears Press the A or V key to select your region and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu Press the A or V key to select Summer Time Press the OK key Summer Time appears Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Setting menu Press the A or V key to select Date Time Press the OK key Date Time appears Press the lt or gt k
265. ing and toner replacement Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages paper jams and other problems Chapter 11 Management Explains user login administration and job accounting Appendix Explains how to enter characters and lists the machine specifications Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine Provides information on media types and paper sizes Also includes a glossary of terms xxvii Conventions in This Guide The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description Convention Bold Description Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen Example Press the Start key Regular Indicates a selection item on the Message Display Select System Italic Indicates a message displayed on the Message Display Ready to copy is displayed Used to emphasize a key word phrase or references to additional information For more information refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2 7 Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference Important Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems IMPORTANT Caution Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it CAUTION xxviii 1 Part Names This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys
266. ings menu appears Common Settings m 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 8 45 Default Setting System Menu Color Selection m Auto Color B amp W Full Color Scan Resolution Press the A or V key to select Color Selection Press the OK key Color Selection appears Press the A or V key to select Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color Grayscale or Black amp White Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Select the default scanning resolution The options are 600x600dpi 400x400dpi U Fin Ultra Fine 300x300dpi 200x400dpi S Fin Super Fine 200x200dpi Fine 200x100dpi Norm Normal Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select
267. inistrator Password T Account ID Cones 8 Click OK 9 The machine is registered to the PC and the machine name and model name are displayed in the Scanner List field Scanner List Name Delete NOTE Click Delete to delete the added machine Click Edit to change names and other settings 2 27 Preparation before Use Setting the WIA Driver Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 Register this machine to the WIA Driver NOTE The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver 1 Click Start Control Panel and then Scanners and Cameras For Windows 7 in the search box type scanners and cameras and then click Scanners and Cameras 2 Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers and press Properties If you do not see your device in the list make sure it is connected to the computer and turned on then choose Refresh Scanners and Cameras WIA Driver Refresh Add Device Scan Profiles Do I need to use this to install my scanner or camera NOTE If Windows Security and User Account Control are displayed no trouble should be found with operation after installing the driver and software we have provided Continue installation 3 When the machine is connected with the USB cable click the Settings tab
268. inued on next page Sound Buzzer FAX Speaker FAX Monitor Display Bright Orig Paper Set Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Cassette 1 Set Cassette 2 Set Cassette 3 Set MP Tray Set Media Type Set Media for Auto Def PaperSource SpcialPaper Act Preset Limit Measurement Error Handling Date Setting Timer Setting Auto Panel Reset PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Sleep Rules models for Europe Sleep Level models except for Europe Sleep Timer Auto Err Clear Err Clear Timer Unusable Time Function Default Continued on next page Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution page 8 6 page 8 6 page 8 6 page 8 7 page 8 7 page 8 9 page 8 10 page 8 12 page 8 12 page 8 12 page 8 14 page 8 16 page 8 19 page 8 20 page 8 21 page 8 23 page 8 24 page 8 25 page 8 27 page 8 40 page 8 40 page 8 35 page 8 36 page 8 37 page 8 39 page 8 32 page 8 32 page 8 43 page 8 45 page 8 46 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide xiii System Menu Counter key Continued from previous page Continued on next page Common Settings Continued from previous page Function Orig Image Copy Default Continued
269. ion FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Orig Image Copy 8 47 Default Setting System Menu Photo Text Orig Image Copy 0I Text Photo 6 Press the OK key Orig Image Copy appears Original Image Send 7 Press the A or V key to select Text Photo Photo Text or Light Text Line 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Set the default original document type for sending The available default settings are shown below Item Description Text and photos together Text Photo Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software Light Text Line Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals for sending 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Sound Common Settings gt m lol Language Default Screen 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 48 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Defaul
270. ion as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBU
271. ional language Message display Turkish T rk e Greek EXAnvika Polish Polski Czech Cesky Hungarian Magyar Finnish Suomi Hebrew Arabic Swedish Svensk Danish Norwegian Romanian 8 3 Default Setting System Menu Optional language Message display Korean pt of Simplified Chinese Bi ak FR Traditional Chinese ee chy If you are using one of the optional languages it is displayed in place of Portugues Press the A or V key to select a language Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 4 Default Setting System Menu Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start up default screen The options are as follows The table below lists the available screens Item Description Status The Status Job Cancel screen the screen shown when the Status Job Cancel key is pressed appears Copy The Copy screen the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed appears Send The Send screen the screen shown when the Send key is pressed appears FAX The FAX screen the screen shown when the FAX key is pressed appears Document Box The Document Box screen the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed appears Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Cou
272. ions Set the accounting settings using PRESCRIBE again Reference Page Add toner Is the displayed message accompanied by a lit attention LED Replace the toner container Cannot connect to Authentication Server Press the OK key and check the following items e Registration to Authentication Serve Password and computer address for Authentication Server Connection of Network Cannot duplex print on this paper Did you select a paper size media type that cannot be duplex printed Select the available paper type Press the OK key to print without using Duplex Cannot execute this job Restricted by Group Authorization This job is canceled because it is restricted by Group Authorization Press the OK key Cannot feed paper set cassette 1 Is any of the paper feeders or the printer cassette upper than the selected one properly closed when one or more optional feeders are installed Close the paper feeder properly Check cassette 1 Does a paper lift error occurr in the paper source s cassette Pull out the cassette for the paper source displayed either the paper cassettes or optional paper feeders and check if the paper is loaded correctly Close Document Processor Is the document processor open Close the document processor Is the top cover of the document processor open Close the top cover of the document processor Close front cov
273. is switched off 6 After you finish installing the memory module secure the memory slot cover with screws removed in step 3 7 Reinstall the right cover Appendix 3 Removing the Memory Module Verifying the expanded memory Network Interface Kit ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn only Option Interface Slot Wireless Network Interface Kit ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn only Option Interface Slot Card Authentication Kit B To remove a memory module remove the right cover and the memory slot cover from the machine Then carefully push out the two socket clamps Ease the memory module out of the socket to remove To verify that the memory module is working properly test it by printing a status page The Network Interface Kit provides a high speed connection for the Gigabit per second interface Since the kit was designed to work with TCP IP and NetBEUI protocols it fulfills the network printing demands on Windows Macintosh and UNIX environments This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802 11n Max 300 Mbps and 11 g b With the utilities supplied settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols User login administration can be performed using ID cards To do so itis necessary to register ID card information on the previously registered local user list For more information about how to register this information refer to the Card A
274. it f A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and eoc e press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login mN 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt lol Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Optional Network mN Press the OK key The Optional Network screen Optional Network gt appears Basic Exit 8 166 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the A or V key to select Basic 6 Press the OK key The Basic menu screen appears Basic O Host Name TCP IP Settings Bonjour Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Bonjour 8 Press the OK key Bonjour appears Bonjour pata OK ol Oft On 9 Press the A or V key to select On or Off and then press the OK key Gq Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt M select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password with administrator pr
275. ity Used Area Free Space When you press Remove the Left Select key a USB memory can be confirmation screen appears and you can remove the safely removed USB memory OK 4 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Status menu 7 21 Status Job Cancel 7 22 8 Default Setting System Menu This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel Common Seling Scassa OOO omen cit RAE EE E E E 8 79 j ae ene PEET T eats ts E 8 100 Document Box Settings ssiri iinssnisinisinisisssienii 0107 thas ee Notice oe sccecenccosesesonerceciess ae Optional Functions eae ee eee 8 17 T7 8 1 Default Setting System Menu Common Settings Common settings include e How to display the Sys Menu Count menu 8 2 e Switching the Language for Display Language 8 3 e Default Screen 8 5 e Sound 8 6 e Display Bright 8 7 e Original Paper Settings 8 7 e Switching Unit of Measurement 8 24 e Error Handling 8 25 e Date Timer 8 27 e Function Defaults 8 45 e Login Operation 8 73 e RAM Disk Mode 8 74 e Optional Memory 8 75 e Disp Status Log 8 76 e TonerAlert Level 8 78 How to display the Sys Menu Count menu Sne 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit ystem Menu Counter operation panel When you are performing user management and have Logi
276. ivileges to log in and pe ee press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Optional Network 8 167 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Optional Network screen Optional Network gt appears Basic Exit Press the A or V key to select Basic Press the OK key The Basic menu screen appears Basic gt oK Host Name TCP IP Settings Bonjour Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select IPSec 8 Press the OK key The IPSec screen appears IPSec Pad OK ol Oft On 9 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Basic menu 8 168 Default Setting System Menu LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used The default setting is Auto Use the procedure below to select the interface 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name 0 password with administrator privileges to log in and e AEA E press Login the Right Sel
277. ize O Original Image m Exit 4 A 5 Color Selection 0m 0i Auto Color Gray Auto Color B amp W Full Color 6 7 8 Press the Send key Place the original Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Color Selection Press the OK key Color Selection appears Press the A or V key to select the desired color mode Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 13 Sending Functions Continuous Scan When the multi page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job With this function originals can be scanned one after another until you press End Scan the Right Select key The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below 1 2 Function Menu Kad OK Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Continuous Scan gt i ol OfF On 5 6 7 8 Press the Send key Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Continuous Scan Press the OK key Continuous Scan appears Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key
278. jour will run correctly Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets If Bonjour does not run stably check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour Default Gateway This indicates the device such as a computer or router that serves as the entrance exit gateway for accessing computers outside the network that you are on When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP that automatically resolves IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses on a TCP IP network DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned dpi dots per inch a A unit for resolution representing the number of dots printed per inch 25 4 mm EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers page description languages FTP File Transfer Protocol A protocol to transfer files on the TCP IP network whether the Inter
279. k Express Install NOTE To install Status Monitor it is necessary to install Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 beforehand Kyocera Product Library Px Setup has detected that the following prerequisites have not been met Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 www microsoft com 4 You can also select Use host name for port name and set to use the host name of the standard TCP IP port A Ruse ae USB connection cannot be used amp Forres Tasal dd multiole devices and iting utes NOTE The machine cannot be detected unless it is on If the computer fails to detect the machine verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it is turned on and click Reload 5 Select the package ress Instal R Guraredse deiceand is iver The following software will be installed e Driver Package KX Driver Status Monitor Fonts e Scan Package Kyocera TWAIN Driver 6 Click Install NOTE If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway 2 18 Preparation before Use a gt Finished Your software is ready to use Details I Product Detail KX DRIVER Installed Kyocerai Kyocera TWAIN Driver Installed FONTS Installed a Elg Print atest page a Gp Enable event notification a i Show Quick Print tab
280. k by referring to the illustration below Administrator s PC Printing Network FAX Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable 1000BASE T 100BASE TX or 10BASE T Command Center RX Network settings Scanner default settings User and destination registration Network FAX FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed Network Network USB Network USB Send E mail Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E mail message Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices 2 3 Preparation before Use Preparing Necessary Cables The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use Available Standard Interfaces Function Printer Scanner TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning Network FAX Interface Network interface Necessary Cable LAN 10BASE T 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T Shielded Printer TWAIN Scanning WIA Scanning USB interface USB2 0 compatible cable
281. k interface card click Reset in the Management Settings menu and then click Restart Network in Restart 2 32 Preparation before Use E mail settings By configuring the SMTP settings you can send E mail notifications on completed jobs To use this function this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol In addition check the following The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full time connection via a LAN is recommended e SMTP settings Use Command Center RX to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server If limits have been set on the size of E mail messages it may not be possible to send very large E mails The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below 1 Access Command Center RX by referring to Accessing Command Center RX on 2 30 2 From the Function Settings menu click E mail KYOCERA Model Command Center EX st Name A Last Updated A Home Function Settings E mail 2013 08 23 13 38 42 Q Admin SMTP SMTP Protocol off Note Device Information gt Settings must be made in SMTP E mail TX LJ Protocol LA SMTP Server Name p J0b Status j F Document Box SMTP Server Timeout 10 seconds _JAddress Book Authentication Protocol Off 5 Note Fe Device Settings Make settings here Protocol a Domain Restriction Common Job Defaults POP3 Scan to Folder SMT
282. key 4 Check the login user name and password are correct and press Login the Right Select key To log out the machine press the Logout key to return to the login user name login password entry screen Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases When the machine is in sleep mode When auto panel reset is activated Management Adding a User This adds a new user You can add Up to 100 users including the default login user name The table below explains the user information to be registered Description User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list up to 32 characters Login User Enter the login user name to log in up to 32 Name characters The same login user name cannot be registered Login Enter the password to log in up to 64 characters Password Access Level Select Administrator or User for user access privileges Account Name Add an account where the user belongs The user who registered his her account name can log in without entering the account ID Refer to Job Accounting on page 11 15 E mail Address The user can register his her E mail address The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E mail function Mandatory at user registration NOTE By default one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored The following
283. key to select Cassette 1 Type Size Exit Rough Recycled Cassette 1 Type gt m 12 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Type appears 13 Press the A or V key to select the desired paper type and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray specify the paper size When using other than a plain paper specify the media type Item Description Standard Sizes Select from the standard sizes Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size Letter Legal Statement Executive and Oficio j Metric size A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Enter the size not included in the standard size Selectable paper sizes are as follows Inch size X Vertical 5 83 14 02 in 0 01 increments Y Horizontal 2 16 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric size X Vertical 148 356 mm in 1mm increments Y Horizontal 70 216 mm in 1mm increments Media Type 8 16 Selectable media types are as follows Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead
284. l Setting pata OK 0 2 in 1 layout 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit Image Quality pata OK 2 3 1 10 Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected Select the default value in the range from 1 Low High Comp high compression to 5 High Low Comp low compression Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Image Quality Press the OK key Image Quality appears Press the A or V key to select from 1 Low High Comp to 5 High Low Comp Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 70 Default Setting System Menu Color TIFF Comp Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the
285. l paper in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper Appendix 14 Transparency OHP film Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing Transparencies must meet the following conditions Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190 C Thickness 0 100 to 0 110 mm Material Polyester Dimensional accuracy 0 7 mm Squareness of corners 90 0 2 To avoid problems use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine If transparencies jam frequently at output try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected Cardstock Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray fan them and align the edges If the Hagaki paper is curled straighten it before loading Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki available at post offices Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Appendix 15 Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray fo
286. lap Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides keeping the printing side face up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray Load envelope with the print side facing up Cardstock i Return postcard Hagaki Portrait form Landscape form Oufuku Hagaki envelopes envelopes NOTE Use unfolded return postcard Oufuku Hagaki IMPORTANT How to load envelopes orientation and facing will differ depending on the type of envelope Be sure to load it in correctly otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face NOTE When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 56 2 53 2 Preparation before Use Specifying Paper Size and Media The default paper size setting for cassette for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder cassettes 2 and 3 is Letter and the default media type setting is Plain To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes specify the paper size and media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on this page To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray specify the paper size setting Refer to Specifying P
287. lect Date Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The Date Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Date Time Press the OK key The screen to enter the date of Date Time appears Set the date Press the lt or gt key to move to the item Year Month Day you want to enter Press the A or V key to set each item Press the OK key The screen to enter the time of Date Time appears Set the time Press the lt or gt key to move to the item Hour Min Second you want to enter Press the A or V key to set each item Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu NOTE If you try to change the date time when a trial application page 8 177 is running the If you change Date Time setting trial functions will be unavailable Are you sure message is displayed To change the date time press Yes the Left Select key 8 28 Default Setting System Menu Date Format Select the display format of year month and date The year is displayed in Western notation Use the procedure below to select the date format 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit
288. lect System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit 8 160 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt W Network Setting I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting los Secure Protocol Host Name LAN Interface Exit Secure Protocol lt m HTTP Security LDAP Security SMTP Security Exit SMTP Security lt m brof TTT SSL STARTTLS A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears 7 Press the A or V key to select SMTP Security 8 Press the OK key SMTP Security appears 9 Press the A or V key to select Off SSL or STARTTLS 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu 8 161 Default Setting System Menu POP3 Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3 server The default setting is Off NOTE POP3 E mail RX m
289. llest unused address number is automatically allocated You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and 50 numbers for groups Detail lt 0 Address Number 4 4 019 Edit Address Number 001 250 Editing a Destination 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Address Number 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen appears 3 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number 4 Press the OK key The address number is registered NOTE If you enter an address number that is already registered the screen will display This address number is already registered and return to the screen of step 2 Edit delete the destinations individuals you added to the Address Book Use the procedure below to edit a destination Sys Menu Count FAX Document Box U Edit Destination Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Edit Destination 8 131 Default Setting System Menu Edit Destination gt M 01 Addressbook Print List Exit Addressbook lt m Fiala amp Maury Menu Menu m 01 Detail Edit Delete Add Address Detail 0 Contact name 1 7 Sally Edit Overwrite Are you sure Msally Yes I No 10 11 Press the OK key The Edit Destination me
290. ly sealed within the protective housing and external cover In the normal operation of the product by user no radiation can leak from the machine This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825 1 2007 Caution Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area DANGER ATTENTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION VARO CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN CLASSE 3B RADIAZIONE LASER INVISIBILE IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO CLASSE 3B RADIACIONE LASER INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LUOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN HARAR MK m FART RAS ARIE PRIORI RERAIBATARACtEM HHRMA RES PRIORI CLASS 3B a7 aloldaas AA Alors CCRMSEISA3BRARL V_KNTES EL RB RIED MANET CTERU The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT Legal Restriction on Copying Scanning e It may be prohibited to copy scan copyrighted mater
291. me Me Tray Peioricy Paper Feed Mode Auto Cass Change Resolution Send Select Key Set DestinationCheck Default Screen Send and Forward Document Box Sub Address Box Job Box Polling Box Select Key Set Edit Destination Address Book Piette WiSe Adjust Maint Continued on next page Copy Denst Adj Send Box Density Backgrnd Density Print Density Correct Bk Line page 8 84 page 8 87 page 8 88 page 8 89 page 8 90 page 8 91 page 8 92 page 8 92 page 8 93 page 8 94 page 8 95 page 8 96 page 8 97 page 8 98 page 8 99 page 8 100 page 8 102 page 8 103 page 8 103 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 8 107 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 8 109 page 8 122 page 8 122 page 8 116 page 8 117 page 8 117 page 8 118 page 8 119 XV System Menu Counter key Continued from previous page Adjust Maint Continued from previous page Service Setting Service Status Network Status New Developer FAX Country Code FAX Call Set Remote Diag Set Remote Diag ID DP Adjustment page 8 113 page 8 113 page 8 120 Refer to the FAX Operation Guide Refer to the FAX Operation Guide page 8 121 Xvi Environment The service
292. ment on page 8 24 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8 refer to Media Type Set on page 8 16 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 NOTE You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8 14 Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Collate O Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Paper Selection 4 4 Copying Functions Paper Selection a4 Plain zas p Plain om MP Tray Set 0I Standard Size Size Entry Pa OK Size Entry Y 5 83 14 02 t IESI Media Type Transparency Rough om 10 11 Press the OK key Paper Selection appears Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Set Press the OK key MP Tray Set appears Press the A or V key to select Standard Size or Size Entry and press the OK key select the desired paper size and then press the OK key If you select Size Entry using the numeric keys to enter the Y vertical size and press the OK key and then enter the X horizontal size and press
293. ministrator privileges e Ifthe Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel e Ifthe autorun screen is displayed click Run setup exe e Ifthe user account management window appears click Yes Allow N Display the screen 2 19 Preparation before Use T Cestom Install printing utes NETI y Gaatyeovs dre ants Add multiole devices and ii Language Eel Click Custom Install Select the device to be installed The following buttons can be used This changes the display to icon and text display Use this to select multiple items If the desired device does not appear press this a button to directly select the device 5 Select the driver to be installed 7 Click Install NOTE If the Windows security window appears click Install this driver software anyway To install Status Monitor it is necessary to install Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 beforehand Kyocera Product Library Setup has detected that the following prerequisites have not been met Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 www microsoft com 2 20 Preparation before Use 8 Finishthe ins
294. mmon Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lt m Default Screen Sound Exit 8 65 Default Setting System Menu Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Detail Setting paid OK 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit Border Line bmg OK Solid Line i Dotted Line Orig Binding 10 Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Border Line Press the OK key Border Line appears Press the A or V key to select None Solid Line i Dotted Line or Positioning Mark Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when 2 sided gt gt 1 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided is selected for Duplex Items available for the default value are as follows o f e O HH Left Right Left right binding Ha Top Top binding 8 66 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original 1 Inthe S
295. mong them 5 destinations can be assigned for a FTP or SMB address The available addresses will be 95 in total for email and or fax addresses Use the procedure below to register a group 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Edit Destination FAX Document Box U Edit Destination Exit 8 127 Default Setting System Menu Edit Destination gt M 01 Addressbook Print List Exit Addressbook lt m amp Fiala amp Maury Menu Menu Detail Edit Delete gt wi Add Address m Contact Press the OK key The Edit Destination menu appears Press the A or V key to select Address Book Press the OK key The Address Book list screen appears Press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Add Address Press the OK key Add Address appears Press the A or V key to select Group Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing groups Detail lt OK Group Name 1 4 Sales Section D Edit NOTE If the maximum number of groups has already been registered the screen will display Registered numbers exceeded and return to the Address Book 10 Enter each item and then press the OK key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen Refer
296. move the cursor position horizontally Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Subnet Mask Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 142 is On the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Subnet Mask set the DHCP Setting page 8 142 to Off 8 140 Default Setting System Menu 25 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 26 Press the A or V key to select Default Gateway IPv4 Setting pata OK IP Address Subnet Mask Exit 27 Press the OK key Default Gateway appears Default Gateway Vm el 000 000 000 28 Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position horizontally Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the Default Gateway Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 142 is On the current Default Gateway is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an Default Gateway set the DHCP Setting page 8 142 to Off 29 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 8 141 Default Setting System Menu DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server The default setting is On Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP settin
297. n and ET press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login J 4 The Date Settings menu appears Date Setting lt m Date Format Time Zone Exit Press the A or V key to select Summer Time Press the OK key Summer Time appears Summer Time lt m off 02 On Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Date Settings menu 8 31 Default Setting System Menu Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during printing the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user In the Auto Error Clear mode automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses The following errors are automatically cleared Cannot duplex print on this paper Send error Cannot connect to Authentication Server Incorrect account ID Job is canceled Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot print Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot scan Job not stored Press OK Job Accounting restriction exceeded Job is canceled Polling box limit exceeded Job is canceled Memory is full Print job cannot be processed completely Maximum Number of scanned pages Job is canceled Print overrun Job is paused KPDL error Job is canceled USB memory error Job is canceled No multi copies Press OK e Auto Error Clear ON OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not Use
298. n operate from step 3 Choosing by One Touch Key Select the destination using the One touch keys 15 In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry C C screen press the one touch key where the destination is registered 18 19 C C NOTE Refer to Adding a Destination on One touch Key on page 8 133 for more information on adding one touch keys O Shift Lock KS Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending You can specify destinations that combine e mail addresses folders SMB or FTP and fax numbers This is referred to as Multi Sending This is useful for sending to different types of destination e mail addresses folders etc in a single operation No of broadcast items E mail Up to 100 Folders SMP FTP Total of 5 SMB and FTP FAX Up to 100 Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types Continue to enter E mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time 3 27 Basic Operation Canceling Jobs Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed Canceling Jobs You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key Job Cancel List 0m Send Job List Store Job List Exit Print Job List paid OK 0009 Diymaury s data H 0010 DMi
299. n Menu 4 12 Copying Functions Continuous Scan When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job With this function originals are scanned until you press End Scan the Right Select key The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below 1 Press the Copy key 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Collate O Duplex O Exit Press the A or V key to select Continuous Scan 4 Press the OK key Continuous Scan appears Continuous Scan gt m ol OfE On 5 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying 6 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key 7 Place the next original and press the Start key Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals After scanning all originals press End Scan the Right Select key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 13 Copying Functions Job Finish Notice Sends a notice by E mail when a copy job is complete User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for co
300. n User Name WM not logged in a login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password to log in Login Password NOTE Login e The following administrator is registered in the machine at the factory Login User Name 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Login Password Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 2 Sys Menu Count 0m Counter System Network Exit The Sys Menu Count menu appears 8 2 Default Setting System Menu Switching the Language for Display Language You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below You can optionally download messages in other languages Contact your service technician for information 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings gt m 3 Press the A or V key to select Language Default Screen Sound Exit 4 Press the OK key The Language menu appears qe Language paid OK The available languages are as follows peneoen English Fran ais Deutsch Fran ais Espa ol Italiano Nederlands Pycckn Portugu s The optional languages are as follows Opt
301. nd loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 Expansion Memory To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed you can plug in optional memory module dual in line memory module in the memory slot provided on the main controller board You can select additional memory module from 256 MB 512 MB or 1 GB The maximum memory size is 1536 MB NOTE The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician We shall not be liable for any damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory Appendix 2 Precautions for Handling the Memory Module To protect electronic parts discharge static electricity Correct Incorrect from your body by touching a water pipe faucet or other large metal object before handling the memory module Or wear an antistatic wrist strap if possible when you install the memory module Installing the Memory Module 1 Tum off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable 2 Remove the right cover 3 Remove the screws and the memory slot cover as shown in the figure 4 Remove the memory module from its package Aligning the cutouts of the memory module with the matching keys of the socket carefully plug the memory module into the memory socket until it clicks in place Then push down the memory module to secure CAUTION Before inserting a memory module in the machine make sure that the machine
302. nd PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation IBM and IBM PC AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Bonjour Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc Helvetica Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Bookman ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc are installed in this machine This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide xxii GPL LGPL This product contains GPL http www gnu org licenses gpl html and or LGPL http www gnu org licenses Igpl html software as part of its firmware You can get the source code and you are permitted to copy redistribute and modify it under the terms of GPL LGPL For further information including availability of the source code visit http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com gpl OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2006 The OpenSSL Project All right
303. nd password are correct and press Login the Right Select key NOTE The following administrator is registered in the machine at the factory Login User Name 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Login Password 30 ppm model 3000 35 ppm model 3500 Logout To logout from the machine press the Logout to return to the login user name password entry screen Logout 3 2 Basic Operation One Touch Keys and Program Keys The one touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below One Touch Key Register destinations to one touch keys and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable one touch key For registering a destination to a one touch key refer to Adding a Destination on One touch Key on page 8 133 Entering Destination with One touch Key 1 In Address Entry press the one touch key where the Address Entry OD desired destination is registered Recalling from One touch Keys 1 to 11 ABC Press the one touch key where the destination is Text registered Recalling from One touch Keys 12 to 22 Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the lamp next to the keys and then press the one touch key where the destination is registered 2 The destination registered to the one touch key is Address Entry 0 recalled and automatically entered on the screen SyQHFEEFEEH HH co jpili ABC Text Program Keys Settings of various
304. nding Settings 8 100 DestinationCheck 8 102 Quick Setup Registration 8 100 Send and Forward 8 103 Sending Size Selection 5 3 Sending to Different Types of Destinations Multi Sending 3 27 Separator Cleaning 9 5 Setting Date and Time 2 11 Setup Copy 8 79 Date Timer 8 27 Network 8 136 Printer 8 84 Send 8 100 Slit Glass Cleaning 9 3 SMTP Appendix 24 Solving Malfunctions 10 2 Specifications Common functions Appendix 18 Copy functions Appendix 20 Document Processor Appendix 22 Environmental Specifications Appendix 22 Printer functions Appendix 21 Scanner functions Appendix 21 Specifying Destination 3 25 Status Job Cancel 7 1 Status Page 8 111 Appendix 25 Subnet Mask Appendix 25 Switching the Language 2 9 8 3 Switching Unit of Measurement 8 24 Symbols i System Menu 8 1 T TCP IP Appendix 25 TonerAlert Level 8 78 Top cover 1 6 Trade Names xxii TWAIN Appendix 25 U Unusable Time 8 43 USB Appendix 25 USB Cable Connecting 2 5 USB Interface 2 4 USB Memory JPEG TIFF Print 6 3 Printing Documents 6 2 Removing 6 7 Saving Documents 6 5 XPS FitTo Page 6 4 User Login Administration 11 2 Adding 11 6 Changing Properties 11 9 Displaying Network User Propertiy 11 12 Enabling Disabling 11 2 Enabling Disabling Group Authentication 11 11 Login 11 5 Logout 11 5 Unknown login user name Job 11 13 W WIA Appendix 25 WSD Scan 5 17 X XPS File formats 5 9 8 59 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6 5
305. nel Exit 5 17 Sending Functions 5 Press the A or V key to select From Oper Panel 6 Select the destination computer from the computer list Select Computer m Press Detail the Right Select key to see the computer02 information of the selected computer B computer03 Cancel Detail 7 Press the OK key to confirm the destination and then Press Start Key press the Start key Transmission starts Ey computer01 NOTE To change the destination computer press the Back key and then press Yes the Left Select key This brings you back to step 6 NOTE To use WSD Scan from your computer press From Computer in step 5 and then scan the original from the computer 5 18 Sending Functions Job Finish Notice This feature sends an e mail providing notification that transmission has been completed Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK 0 Color Selection O Original Size Oo Original Image O Exit Press the A or V key to select JobFinish Notice oe 5 Press the OK key JobFinish Notice appears JobFinish Notice 0m On 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key A 7 Press the A or V key to select Address Book or Dest
306. net or an intranet Along with HTTP and SMTP POP FTP is now frequently used on the Internet Grayscale A computer color expression Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest without any other colors Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels that is white and black only for 1 bit 256 gray levels including white and black for 8 bits and 65 536 gray levels for 16 bits Appendix 23 IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots e g 192 168 110 171 Each number should be between 0 and 255 IPP IPP Internet Printing Protocol is a standard that uses TCP IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption KPDL Kyocera Page Description Language Kyocera s PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3 Multi Purpose MP Tray Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes Hagaki transparencies or labels
307. ninstall Wizard 2 Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted Click Uninstall If a system restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the software uninstallation procedure NOTE The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library In the Product Library installation screen click Uninstall and follow the on screen instructions to uninstall the software 2 25 Preparation before Use Setting TWAIN Driver Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver 1 Start the TWAIN Driver by clicking start gt All Programs gt Kyocera gt TWAIN Driver Setting 2 Click Add Scanner List Name About Help 3 Enter the machine name in the Name field Scanner Address nni iow Hn mm iow Hih Secure Protocol Setting User Authentication Settings Help Cancel 4 Click W next to the Model field and select this machine from the list 5 Enter the machine s IP address or host name in the Scanner Address NOTE When the machine s IP address is unknown contact Administrator 6 Click User Authentication Settings If user login administration is invalid go to Step 8 2 26 Preparation before Use 7 Select the checkbox beside Authentication enter Login User Name up to 64 characters and Password up to 64 characters and then click OK IV Authentication Login user name adm
308. nner Printer or FAX 3 Press the OK key This displays the status of the device Scanner OK selected in step 2 Ready Printer oK Processing FAX ok Ready Log 4 Press the OK key The screen returns to the Status menu The items you can check are described below Scanner The information scanning pausing etc is displayed Printer Information waiting printing etc is displayed FAX The information sending waiting etc is displayed 7 20 Status Job Cancel If you press Log the Right Select key the Log menu Log lt 0 appears From this screen you can check or print the lol Outgoing FAX Log transmission reception history Incoming FAX Log Outgoing FAX Rpt NOTE If you are using a user management function the menu for printing the transmission reception history appears only when you have logged in as an administrator Handling the Devices USB Memory 1 Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu Status lt 0 appears 02 Paper Status 03 Memory Card USB Memor Pause 2 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory 3 Press the OK key This displays the status of the USB USB Memory i OK memory Capacity 1 3 512 0MB Remove Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Capac
309. nsufficient memory Press the OK key to print the scanned pages Press the Cancel key to cancel the printing job Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot print The job is canceled Press the OK key Job Accounting restriction exceeded Cannot scan The job is canceled Press the OK key Job Accounting restriction exceeded Job is canceled Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print any more This job is canceled Press the OK key Job not stored Press OK KPDL error Job is canceled Press the OK key to store the job The job is canceled Press the OK key Load paper in cassette 1 Is the indicated cassette out of paper Load paper 10 7 Troubleshooting Error Message Load paper in MP Tray Check Points Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray Corrective Actions Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the Message Display Reference Page Machine failure Call service Maximum Number of scanned pages Job is canceled Internal error has occurred Make a note of the error code displayed on the Message Display Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and contact your Service Representative Is Error code C4200 displayed
310. nt m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m Language 3 Press the A or V key to select Default Screen Sound Exit 4 Press the OK key Default Screen appears Default Screen Km OK Status FAX Press the A or V key to select the default screen Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 5 Default Setting System Menu Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details The asterisk in the table is a default setting Description Key Off On Emit a sound when the Confirmation control panel are pressed Job Finish Off On FAX RX Only Emit a sound when a print only on products with job is normally completed the FAX function installed Ready Off On Emit a sound when the warm up is completed Warning Off On Emit a sound when errors occur Use the procedure below to set the buzzer sound for Key Confirmation for example 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m
311. nt menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Error Handling 4 Press the OK key The Error Handling menu appears Error Handling paid OK 01 DuplexPaperError PaperMismatchErr Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select DuplexPaperError 8 25 Default Setting System Menu DuplexPaperl 1 sided 07 Disolay Error Error Kad ox Error Handling Kma oK DuplexPaperError PaperMismatchErr Exit PaperMismatchErr gt Ignore 07 Display Error 11 12 Press the OK key DuplexPaperError appears Press the A or V key to select the method to handle if duplex is disabled Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu Press the A or V key to select PagerMismatchErr Press the OK key PagerMismatchErr appears Press the A or V key to select the method to handle paper mismatch Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Error Handling menu 8 26 Default Setting System Menu Date Timer Date Timer settings include Date Time
312. nting allowed Change names for Custom 1 8 Names should be not more than 16 characters Selecting media type at multi purpose tray the name after change will be displayed 8 16 Default Setting System Menu Use the procedure below to set the media type setting Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Settings 0m Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set m Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Media type Set 0M Transparency Rough Exit Plain bmg OK lol Paper Weight Exit Paper Weight Normal 6 Normal 2 L 3 Normal LL om 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Media Type Set 6 Press the OK key Media Type Set menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select the paper type for which you want to make settings 8 Press the OK key The menu for the selected paper type appears 9 Press the A or V key to select Paper Weight 10 Press the OK key The Paper Weight menu appears Default Setting System Menu Plain bmg OK
313. nts in the top 3 folder levels including the root directory can be viewed 6 Press Select the Right Select key The selected file USB Memory Said OK name is indicated by a checkmark next to it 4Store File Folder 1 File 1 Z Menu Select When you want to print additional files repeat steps 5 to 6 to select them 7 Press the OK key A menu appears USB Memory Sma OK Print Delete Press the A or V key to select Print Press the OK key The basic screen appears Change Ready to print the number of copies 1 sided 2 sided printing etc as Copies 1 necessary For changing print settings refer to A4 4 FL AE Copying on page 3 7and Copying Functions on page 4 1 Sided h Duplex Paper 10 Press the Start key Printing of the selected file begins IMPORTANT When removing the USB memory ensure that you use the correct removal procedure as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6 7 JPEG TIFF Print Sets the print mode for JPEG TIFF files The default setting is Paper Size 1 Follow steps 1 to 9 of Printing on page 6 2 2 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK lo Collate Paper Selection O Duplex oO Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select JPEG TIFF Print 6 3 Document Box JPEG TIFF Print A Kma ox lol Paper Size Image Resolution
314. nu 11 Press the A or V key to select Cassette 1 Type 12 Press the OK key Cassette 1 Type appears 13 Press the A or V key to select the paper type 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set menu 8 13 Default Setting System Menu Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray Set up frequently used size and media type before use The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Item Description Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 Custom Plain 105 g m or less Transparency Rough Vellum 64 g m or less Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick 106 g m and more High Quality Custom 1 8 Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 10 for selecting Custom Paper Size Refer to Media Type Set on page 8 16 for selecting Custom 1 8 from Media Type To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead refer to Special Paper Action on page 8 21 NOTE To change to a media type other than Plain refer to Media Type Set on page 8 16 Use the procedure below to select the paper si
315. nu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count M select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt m Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Copies 4 Press the OK key Copies appears Copies 1 999 MEE opies 5 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 90 Default Setting System Menu Orientation Set the default orientation Portrait or Landscape Portrait Printer Landscape Printer Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing Sys Menu Count Common Settings Copy Printer Exit Printer O 01 Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Orientation O lo Portrait Landscape 1 In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Printer Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orientation Press the OK key Orientation appears Press the A or V key to select Portrait or Landscape Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 91 Default Setting System Menu FormFeed Timeout Re
316. nu appears Press the A or V key to select Address Book Press the OK key The Address Book list screen appears Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to edit Press Menu the Right Select key Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Detail Edit Press the OK key This displays the screen for editing the selected destination The screen shown is the one when an individual s destination is selected Edit items as necessary For how to edit each item refer to Adding an Individual Destination on page 8 122 and Adding a Group on page 8 127 After completing editing press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the Address Book list screen 8 132 Default Setting System Menu Adding a Destination on One touch Key This machine has 11 one touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them The one touch keys are arranged as shown below No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 12 No 13 No 14 No 15 No 5 No6 No 7 No 8 No 16 No 17 No 18 No 19 NOTE Refer to One Touch Key on page 3 3 for how to use them Registering new destination Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One touch key 1 Inthe Send or FAX screen press the one touch key to Select Key No 0m which you want to register the destination and hold it 2 seconds or longer Select Ke
317. o On Has the Host Name been entered properly Check the name of the computer to which data is being sent Has the Path been entered properly Check the share name for the shared folder Has the Login User Name been entered properly Check the domain name and login user name Has the same domain name been used for the Host Name and Login User Name Delete the domain name and backslash from the Login User Name Has the Login Password been entered properly Check the login password Have exceptions for Windows Firewall been configured properly Configure exceptions for Windows Firewall properly Do the time settings for the equipment domain server and data destination computer differ Set the equipment domain server and data destination computer to the same time Is the panel displaying Send error Refer to Responding to Send Error You can also enter a full computer name as the host name for example pc001 abcdnet com You can also enter login user names in the following formats Domain_name user_name for example abcdnet james smith User_name domain_name for example james smith abcdnet 10 5 Troubleshooting Responding to Error Messages If the control panel displays any of these messages follow the corresponding procedure Alphanumeric Error Message Account error Check Points Corrective Act
318. o select Timer Setting and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and E E E press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 8 40 Default Setting System Menu 4 The Timer Settings menu appears Timer Setting lt m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Auto Panel Reset 6 Press the OK key Auto Panel Reset appears Auto Panel Reset gt Off 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Timer Settings menu GE Panel Reset Timer If you select On for Auto Panel Reset set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset Options are between 5 and 495 seconds every five seconds The default setting is 90 seconds NOTE If you select Off for Auto Panel Reset the time display does not appear Use the procedure below to set the reset time 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer
319. ob Account Exit 05 Common Settings 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Copy AutoPaperSelect Auto Priority Exit Copy gt m lil Paper Selection 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Press the A or V key to select AutoPaperSelect Same as OrigSize AutoPaperSelect 0l MostSuitableSize 4 Press the OK key AutoPaperSelect appears 5 Press the A or V key to select MostSuitableSize or Same as OrigSize 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 80 Default Setting System Menu Auto Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected select whether automatic zoom reduce zoom is performed The table below shows the available settings The default setting is Off No zoom performed copied in original size Automatic zoom performed as appropriate Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Copy System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 8 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Copy lt m AutoPaperSelect Auto Priority Exit Press the A or V key to select Auto Priority 4 Press the OK key Auto Priority appea
320. ob Log Status Pause ea OK 0I Print Job Status Send Job Status Store Job Status 0006 Smaury 0007 amp tom s 0008 susan Print Job Log s da da s da Detail om A OK OK FAX Press the Status Job Cancel key The Status menu appears Press the A or V key to select Print Job Log Press the OK key Print Job Log appears Press the A or V key to check the print log 7 8 Status Job Cancel A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right of each job OK Job completed normally A Job error Job aborted NOTE For details of other items refer to Print Job Status Screen on page 7 2 Press the OK key or Detail the Right Select key to 0006 Detail lt 0 check the detailed information of the selected print log Result 1 9 Error Press the lt or gt key to switch the display to other information items The items displayed are as follows Result Accepted Time End Time Job Name Job Type User Name Page and Copy number of pages and copies to be printed Original Page number of pages of the original Sender Info destination information 00100 When complete job name not displayed in detailed information When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form press Detail the Right Select key to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen
321. ocation of the jam will be indicated on the Message Display Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper Reference Page Place original and press Start key Remove originals from the document processor put them back in their original order and place them again Press the Start key to resume printing Press the Stop key to cancel the job Polling box limit exceeded Job is canceled Polling box is full and no further storage is available The job is canceled Press the OK key Print overrun Job is canceled The job is canceled Press the OK key RAM disk error Press OK A RAM disk error has occurred Look at the error code given in place of The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 01 Format error Try turning the power off and on again 02 RAM disk mode is Off Turn RAM disk mode On from the operation panel 04 No disk space Purge unnecessary files 05 Specified file is not on disk 06 Insufficient memory to support the RAM disk system Expand the memory Removable memory is full Job is canceled This job is canceled Press the OK key Remove original from document processor Are there any originals left in the document processor Remove originals from the document processor Replace MK Replacement of the parts in the maintenance kit is necessary at every 100 000 pages of printing and re
322. ocedure below to select the default Backgrnd Copy 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 52 Default Setting System Menu Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Backgrnd Copy Auto Backgrnd Copy lo Oft Manual Darker 5 om Backgrnd Send 6 Press the OK key Backgrnd Copy appears 7 Press the A or V key to select Off Auto or Manual Darker 5 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu Select the Backgrnd Send default The available default settings are shown below Item Description Do not adjust background density Manual Darker 5 Set to auto adjustment Set to Darker 5 in manual adjustment Use the procedure below to select the default Backgrnd Send Sys Menu Count gt 00 System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se ttings gt m Language Defaul So
323. oftware application NOTE Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges When connected by USB cable Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep mode To continue the installation press the any key on the operation panel to wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before continuing FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed WIA driver and KX XPS Driver cannot be installed on Windows XP Installing Printer Driver in Windows Express Install The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using Express Install For details refer to Custom Install in the Custom Install on page 2 19 1 Insert the DVD NOTE e Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges Ifthe Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box displays select Cancel e Ifthe autorun screen is displayed click Run setup exe e If the user account management window appears click Yes Allow 2 17 Preparation before Use 2 Display the screen Notice By using or installing the device drivers and software included in this package you agree to become bound by the terms and conditions of this license agreement View License Agreement Click View License Agreement and read the License Agreement 3 Clic
324. ok press Menu the Right Select key Address Book Km OK Menu appears amp Fiala amp Maury Menu 7 2 Press the A or V key to select Search Name and then Menu pag OK press the OK key A search screen appears Detail Search Name 3 Enter the characters you want to search Search Name 0 mal A ABC Text 7 4 Press the OK key The address book appears with the Address Book lt 0 user that starts with the entered character string at the top amp Morgan amp Sally Menu Search in External Address Book A 1 In Ext Address Book press Menu the Right Select Ext Address Book 0m key Menu appears amp Maury amp Morgan Menu 2 Pressthe A or V key to select Search and then press Menu Said OK the OK key A search screen appears Select Detail Search 3 26 Basic Operation 3 Enter the characters you want to search Search Name and OK mal If you press Menu the Right Select key and then the OK key Search by appears where you can specify the ABC search key and match condition Select the desired item i for each and then press the OK key Menu Text 4 Press the OK key The address book appears with the xt Address Book gt 00 user that starts with the entered character string at the amp Maury top t Morgan Sally Menu NOTE If you first open the extended address book the search screen appears first The
325. ols The A symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol AN General warning A Warning of high temperature The amp symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol S Warning of prohibited action Q Disassembly prohibited The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol Q Alert of required action oA Remove the power plug from the outlet L Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground 7 connection Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing fee required NOTE An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function Contents Contents Quick GUWE 224 ccses ened any ey peer eee Deedee eas Ede eee eRe eee ea eee v Menu Mape aiaia anian a aa e aie a iiai a ad BAA aE a Pee dag bbb ane qt viii Environment coer napaea ine e a E a A e a a AE xvii Cautions when handling consumables 0 000 eee eee xvii Laser Safety Europ
326. on When specifying destination choose from the Address Book or use the One touch keys Choosing from the Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book A 1 Inthe basic screen for sending press the Address Select Addr Book Wm Book key The Select Addr Book menu appears RA FNelobasteroamstolol lt ext Address Book Exit A 2 Pressthe A or V key to select Address Book and then Address Book Said OK press the OK key Address Book appears To use an address book on the LDAP server select Ext amp Fiala Address Book amp Maury Menu NOTE If extended address book is not registered Select Addr Book is not displayed 3 Press the A or V key to select the desired user or group and then press the OK key 2 If you select a user the list of destinations registered to amp Fiala pai OK the user appears 40667640000 m Fiala HHHHHHHHe If you select a group proceed to step 5 tSMB PC Menu 4 Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and then press the OK key 5 Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below 3 25 Basic Operation Search in Address Book 1 In Address Bo
327. on page 6 7 6 6 Document Box Removing USB Memory Remove the USB memory IMPORTANT Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box Document Box paid OK menu appears Sub Address Box Polling Box USB Memor 2 Press the A or V key to select USB Memory Gi 3 Press the OK key USB Memory appears USB Memory pata OK Folder 1 PAFile 1 o Menu Select 4 Press Menu the Left Select key A menu appears Menu Sma ok Remove NEmory NOTE This is the image on the screen when a folder is selected Open is not displayed when a file is selected Press the A or V key to select Remove Memory Press the OK key A confirmation message appears USB memory can be safely removed 7 Press OK the Right Select key or remove the USB memory The screen returns to the Document Box menu 6 7 Document Box Printing from a Job Box When RAM Disk Mode is enabled you can use a Job Box to print Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine enabling the data to be printed as needed from the operation panel of the machine If an ID 4 digit number is set when printing is executed from the computer the data can be kept more confidential When an ID is set the ID must be entered in order to print the st
328. oner kit and discard it later according to the local code or regulations for waste disposal Z 3 Take the new toner container out of the toner kit Shake the new toner container at least 5 times as shown in the figure in order to distribute the toner evenly inside the container 4 Remove the label from the toner container 9 5 Maintenance 5 Install the new toner container in the machine Push firmly on the top of the container at the positions marked PUSH until you hear a click 6 Turn the toner container lock lever to the lock position 7 Close the front cover NOTE Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative The collected toner container will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations 9 6 10 Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine Solving MalfUNC ONS isror 10 2 e Responding to Error Messages c ccceeseeeeeees 10 6 e Clearing Paper ain incccntvcciowancenrnvwencaetes 10 13 10 1 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving If a problem occurs with your machine look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages If the problem persists contact your Service Representative Symptom The operation panel
329. operation panel Counter 2 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count gt select Counter and then press the OK key Report Counter System Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Printed Pages or Counter lt 0 Scanned Pages and then press the OK key lol Printed Pages Scanned Pages Exit mooo If you select Printed Pages select by Function or by Printed Pages lt Paper Size in the next screen and then press the OK key by Paper Size Exit 4 Press the lt or gt key to check the count Printed Pages Copy 1 4 1234567 5 After completing checking the count press the OK key The screen returns to the menu for the account 11 38 Appendix Optional Equipment Appendix 2 e Character Entry Method siviciiscicsisesisecasopssedsene Appendix 5 e PADE oann N E Appendix 9 s SpPecicatONS nthudicnaiedsieanaes Appendix 18 Glossa orre S ES Appendix 23 Appendix 1 Optional Equipment Overview of Optional Equipment The following optional equipment is available for the machine Network Interface Kit IB 50 Wireless Network Interface Kit IB 51 Expansion Memory Paper Feeder ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2035dn only Paper Feeder The paper feeder allows you to add three more paper cassettes to the bottom of the machine for continuous feeding of a large volume of paper Paper capacity a
330. or a specific grade of paper Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams which may cause excessive wear of the machine Mixed paper weight i e thickness may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 120 g m for the cassettes and between 60 and 220 g m for the multi purpose tray Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick The proper thickness is between 0 086 and 0 110 mm Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage Moisture affects how the paper is supplied the electrostatic changeability of the paper and how the toner adheres Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room High relative humidity causes paper to become damp making the edges expand so it appears wavy Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6 To maintain the right level of moisture content bear in mind the following
331. ore Loading Paper When you open a new package of paper fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers Finally align the papers on a level flat table If the paper is curled or folded straighten it before loading Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam CAUTION If you copy onto used paper paper already used for copying do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together This may damage the machine NOTE If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled turn the stack in the cassette upside down Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag NOTE If you use special paper such as letterhead paper with holes or paper with pre prints like logo or company name refer to Paper on Appendix 9 2 46 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Cassettes The standard cassette will each hold plain
332. ored data from the machine For the RAM disk settings see RAM Disk Mode on page 8 74 Private Print Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4 digit ID that was entered in the printer driver at the time of printing is entered at the operation panel The data is erased after printing For information on Private Print see Help in the printer driver The procedure for printing stored data is explained below 1 Press the Document Box key The Document Box menu Document Box appears Sub Address Box Polling Box Job Box 2 Press the A or V key to select Job Box 3 Press the OK key The Job Box menu appears Job Box bmg OK ol Private Quick Copy 4 Press the A or V key to select Private Press the OK key The user selection menu appears Private 0m amp Maury 6 Press the A or V key to select the user 7 Press the OK key The print file selection menu appears amp Fiala Sma OK fAData02 oO fAData03 o Menu Select 6 8 Document Box Menu Sma OK Clear All Detail Fiala Sma OK Print Delete Copies oes OK 1 999 ics 8 Press the A or V key to select the file to be printed and then press Select the Right Select key The selected file will be marked If you need to add another file repeat this procedure to select the file NOTE
333. orts PCL and PCL mini driver KPDL There are some restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used with this driver Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAINcompliant software application Kyocera WIA Driver WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition is a function of Windows that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner and an image processing software application An image can be acquired using a WIA compliant software application which is convenient when a TWAINcompliant software application is not installed in the computer FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software application as a fax via the machine Status Monitor The Status Monitor shows a print system status message at the bottom right of the printing screen You can also start Command Center RX to check and change printer settings KYOCERA Net Direct This makes it possible to print a PDF file without Print starting Adobe Acrobat Reader 2 16 Preparation before Use Installation method e Standard installation o Allows selection of Software Description the components to be installed Express Custom Install Install KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine s built in fonts to be used in a s
334. ou load custom size paper enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 56 When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 56 1 Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops 2 Pull out the support tray section of the MP tray 2 50 Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP tray Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP tray or Manual Feed tray For standard paper sizes slide the paper guides to the corresponding mark 4 Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as far as it will go IMPORTANT Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up Curled paper must be uncurled before use Straighten the top edge if it is curled When loading paper into the multi purpose tray check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more first remove the left over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loadin
335. ovides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine Be sure to read this guide before using the machine Safety Guide ECOSYS M2030dn ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2035dn ECOSYS M2535dn Describes the machine installation space cautionary labels and other information Be sure to read this guide before using the machine DVD Product Library Operation Guide This Guide Describes how to load paper basic copy print and scan operations and troubleshooting FAX Operation Guide Describes how to operate FAX check transmission results print reports and use Network FAX Command Center RX User Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Safety Conventions in This Guide The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user other individuals and surrounding objects and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine The symbols and their meanings are indicated below WARNING Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points CAUTION Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage A may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points Symb
336. page 2 7 Paper Recycling This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types Energy Star ENERGY STAR Program We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program ENERGY STAR XXVI About this Operation Guide This Operation Guide contains the following chapters Chapter 1 Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys Chapter 2 Preparation before Use Explains adding paper placing originals connecting the machine and necessary configurations before first use Chapter 3 Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying printing and scanning Chapter 4 Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying Chapter 5 Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals Chapter 6 Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes Chapter 7 Status Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to pause or resume jobs being printed or waiting to print Also explains how to check the device status Chapter 8 Default Setting System Menu Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation Chapter 9 Maintenance Describes clean
337. page 7 15 and register the desired destination 3 Press Yes the Left Select key Accepted is displayed and the job log is sent to the registered destination before the screen returns to the Job Log History menu Setting E mail Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e mail Use the procedure below to set the subject 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to Job Log History 0 select Subject Send History Destination Subject Exit m 2 Press the OK key Subject appears Subject 0 sprinteri ABC Text 3 Enter the e mail subject NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 4 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Job Log History menu 7 17 Status Job Cancel Personal information in the job log When the job log is sent by e mail personal information can be including the job log of the user who logs in Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission Exclude Job Log History m Send History Destination Exit Personal Info Sma OK 1 Inthe Job Log History menu press the A or V key to select Personal Info 2 Press the OK key Personal Info appears Press the A or V key to select Include or Exclude 4 Press the OK key Completed
338. page 8 154 NOTE When Command Center RX is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more information refer to the Command Center RX User Guide Network Setting TCP IP Settings Submenu TCP IP Setting On Off IPv4 Setting DHCP On Off Auto IP On Off IP Address IP address Subnet Mask IP address Default Gateway IP address IPv6 Setting On Off Bonjour On Off Protocol Detail NetBEUI On Off SNMPv3 On Off FTP Server On Off FTP Client On Off Port number 21 SMB On Off SNMP On Off SMTP E mail TX On Off POP3 E mail RX On Off RAW Port On Off LPD On Off IPP On Off Port number 631 IPP Over SSL On Off HTTP On Off 2 14 Preparation before Use On Off On Off WSD SCAN On Off WSD PRINT On Off IPSec IPSec On Off Rule Setting On Off Secure Protocol SSL On Off IPP Security HTTP Security IPP IPP over SSL IPPoverSSL only HTTP HTTPS HTTPS only LDAP Security Off SSL TLS STARTTLS SMTP Security POP3 Security 1 2 3 Off SSL TLS STARTTLS Off SSL TLS STARTTLS LAN Interface Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000Base T NOTE When
339. paper recycled paper or color paper The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m C2 The following paper sizes are supported Legal Oficio II Letter Executive Statement A4 B5 A5 A6 Folio 216 x 340 mm 16K ISO B5 Envelope C5 and Custom IMPORTANT e You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults e When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media npe for the Cassettes on page 2 54 The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g m Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 120 g m in the cassettes Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 120 g m NOTE Statement and A6 can only be used in cassette 1 1 Pull the cassette completely out of the machine IMPORTANT When pulling the cassette out of the machine ensure it is supported and does not fall out 2 Press the bottom plate down until it locks 2 47 Preparation before Use 3 Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the cassette Press the paper width adjusting tab on the left guide and slide the guides to the paper size required NOTE Paper sizes are marked on th
340. paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing To print from the other paper cassette press A or V to display Use alternative press A or V to select the desired paper source and then press OK If there is another cassette with the same size and type of paper printing will automatically continue Use the procedure below to set the Auto Cass Change 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select Printer Common Settings Copy Printer Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer 0m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Auto Cass Change Press the OK key Auto Cass Change appears Auto Cass Change gt Off 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 98 Default Setting System Menu Resolution Set the resolution for printing from a computer Use the procedure below to set Resolution setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count Mm select Printer Common Settings Copy Exit 2 Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Printer lt m Emulation Set EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Press the A or V key to select Resolution 8 4 Press the OK key
341. pears I F Block Set gt oK USB Device USB Storage Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Option I F 8 176 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key Option I F appears Option I F O lo Unblock Block 7 Press the A or V key to select Unblock or Block 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the System menu Security Level Security Level setting The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work There is no need for customers to use this menu Optional Functions You can use the optional applications installed on this machine Gq Opt Functions Although nothing is currently displayed when the optional functions that will be released in the future is installed the licenses can be set using this menu 8 177 Default Setting System Menu 8 178 9 Maintenance This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement Bs AG MIN e e E cee E A A AA 9 2 e Toner Container Replacement ccccccceseeeeeeee 9 5 9 1 Maintenance Cleaning Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality CAUTION For safety always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine Glass Platen Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent IMPORTAN
342. pears Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Printer Press the OK key The Printer menu appears Press the A or V key to select EcoPrint Press the OK key EcoPrint appears Press the A or V key to select Off or On Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Printer menu 8 87 Default Setting System Menu Override A4 LTR If A4 size data is printed and there is only a letter size cassette the data is printed on letter paper If letter size data is printed and there is only an A4 size cassette the data is printed on A4 paper The table below shows the available Item Description settings If A4 size data is printed and there is only a letter size cassette the data is printed on letter paper If letter size data is printed and there is only an A4 size cassette the data is printed on A4 paper A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size Use the procedure below to specify the override A4 Letter setting The default setting is On Sys Menu Count Common Settings Copy Printer Exit Printer m EcoPrint Override A4 LTR Exit Override A4 LTR 0m Off 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Print
343. per to Print Set up a frequently used custom paper size The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper The table below lists the sizes that can be registered Input units Dimensions Inch models Cassette 4 13 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Paper Feeder 5 83 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Option 8 27 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments MP Tray 2 76 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Metric models Cassette 105 to 216 in 1 mm increments Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source Paper Feeder Option MP Tray Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size 1 Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 148 to 356 in 1 mm increments 148 to 216 in 1 mm increments 210 to 356 in 1 mm increments 70 to 216 in 1 mm increments 148 to 356 in 1 mm increments LX LX Se PS LX LX X In the Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m Default Screen Sound Exit Orig Paper Set gt Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Custom PaperSize
344. played Press OK the Right Select key The screen shown in step 2 reappears Check and re enter the destination 8 126 Default Setting System Menu Address Number Address Number is an ID for a destination When creating a new destination the smallest unused address number is automatically allocated You can select any available number out of 200 numbers for individuals and 50 numbers for groups 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Address Number Detail Address Number 6 6 053 Edit 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Address Number appears 001 250 3 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the address number 4 Press the OK key The address number is registered NOTE If you enter an address number that is already registered the screen will display This address number is already registered and return to the screen of step 2 Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group Designations in the group can be added at the same time When adding a group a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges Before adding a group in the Address Book the individuals to be included in the group must be added first Up to 100 destinations can be added as the addresses A
345. problems be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself Appenadix 13 Packaging Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes Ideally the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture Specially treated paper We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper even if it conforms to the basic specifications When you use these kinds of paper purchase a small amount first as a sample to test e Glossy paper e Watermarked paper e Paper with an uneven surface e Perforated paper Special Paper This section describes printing onto special paper and print media The following paper and media can be used e Transparency OHP film e Rough e Vellum e Labels e Recycled e Preprinted Bond e Cardstock e Color Colour e Prepunched e Letterhead e Envelope e Thick e High Quality e Custom 1 to 8 When using these paper and media choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers such as laser printers Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies thick paper vellum envelopes cardstocks and label paper Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper Thus special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems Before purchasing specia
346. pying to finish NOTE PC should be configured in advance so that E mail can be used Example of Job Finish Notice To h_pttr owl net net Subject 1234 Job end report mail Job No 000002 Result OK End Time Wed 27 Apr 2005 14 56 08 File Name doc27042005145608 Job Type Copy 1234 00 cO ee d0 01 14 Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies 1 Press the Copy key 2 Place the original 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Collate O Duplex O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select JobFinish Notice Press the OK key JobFinish Notice appears JobFinish Notice gt lo OLE On 6 Press the A or V key to select On and then press the OK key 4 14 Copying Functions Destination li aAddress Book Addre ss Entry om Address M Maury M Morga n Book Menu Address Entry ERANS x abcde fg Jp ABC Text 7 Press the A or V key to select Address Book or Address Entry and then press the OK key 8 Ifyou select Address Book select Address Book on the next screen and press the OK key and then select A the notice destination Press Menu the Right Select key select Detail on the next screen and press the OK key to view the details of the s
347. quires professional servicing Contact your service technician Restricted by Job Accounting Cannot print This job cannot be printed because it is restricted by Job Accounting Press the OK key 10 9 Troubleshooting Error Message Send error HH Check Points Corrective Actions An error has occurred during transmission The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows 1101 The server name of the SMTP server is not set correctly or the host name is incorrect when sending scan data to an FTP server Use Command Center RX and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly 1102 The login user name is incorrect or the domain name has not been entered Enter login user name domain name and password correctly 1103 The network path name is incorrect or you do not have access to the folder specified Use Command Center RX and register the path name correctly 1104 No recipient address Enter E mail address correctly 1105 E mail The SMTP protocol setting is turned off Use Command Center RX and turn on the SMTP protocol setting Scan to PC SMB SMB setting is turned off Use Command Center RX and turn on the SMB setting Scan to PC FTP FTP setting is turned off Use Command Center RX and turn on the FTP setting 1106 The sender address setting under E mail SMTP is not registered Use Command Center RX and register the sender address
348. r V key to select Job Account Set Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears Press the A or V key to select Default Setting Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears Press the A or V key to select Apply Limit Press the OK key Apply Limit appears Press the A or V key to select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu 11 28 Management Default Counter Limit When you add a new account you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used You can set any number from 1 to 9 999 999 in 1 sheet increments The items that can be set differ depending on whether Split or Total is selected for Managing the Copier Printer Counts on page 11 23 Available Settings Split selected for Copier Printer Count Copy Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing Scan Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Other used for scanning excludes copying FAX TX Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets Restriction used for sending faxes Only on products with the FAX function installed Total selected for Copier Printer Count Print Restriction Sets the default restriction on the
349. r envelopes Due to the structure of envelopes printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through Before purchasing envelopes in volume try testing a sample to ensure the print quality Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled Thus keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them Keep the following points in mind Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive In addition do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine Do not use envelopes with certain special features For example do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film covered window If paper jams occur load fewer envelopes at once To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the inner tray at once Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray fan it and align the edges Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler Printing onto paper with rough edges may
350. re as follows Status status of job Accepted Time Job Name Job Type User Name Original Pages number of pages of the original Color B amp W color mode of the original Destination 7 4 Status Job Cancel When complete job name not displayed in detailed information Press Detail the Right Select key in Job Name to see the complete job name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information When there is only one destination press Detail the Right Select key in Destination to see the complete destination name Press the OK key to return to the original screen When there are two or more destinations press List the Right Select key in Destination to display the destination list Press the A or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key This displays the complete name of the destination Press the OK key to return to the destination list Pressing Exit the Right Select key while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original screen The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen Item Key Detail Acceptance No of job Icons that indicate the job type Sending Job FAX g mSending Job PC SMB A Sending Job PC FTP I Sending Job E mail Sending Job TWAIN2 Ey Sending Job WSD Scan fi When broadcast sending is done Broadcast is displaye
351. re debrarediopeedlinghe eer giaes at area d aboneedion d 3 2 One Touch Keys and Program KeyS 00 00 e ee eee eee 3 3 Message Display ic 44 sonrada 4 98h AAG Pea eh ee ee Ph ne Ve ee 3 6 COPYING 24 ouien sities eked ana ee ated Mobanc eiad ined exe Goh eeialace enlech Cnwan ee edad 3 7 Printing Printing from Applications 0 20 00 eee 3 16 SONGING rs v EEEE REE Sosy Oia ae awd eae cele eee a eee ae ee wee ho 3 18 Specifying Destination 0 0 eee 3 25 Canceling Jobse jets soo nese ude hae Rea bat ae el A gees 3 28 Checking Remaining Toner and Paper 000 cece tees 3 29 4 Copying Functions Original SIZ 44 jcaild ste e aaa eee Coad EAEE tee Sh ahaa eae Cowie eee ow 4 2 Paper Selection 444944 dag erakegead Abdoegeag a a a ted dh phe ee ad Gadde he 4 3 Original Orientation 202 0622 bb ee ee ee bbe eee 4 6 ECOPHIN ss ase hee eee Pe RAs Bia eR GAG oY Read Ae eke ee ee elk paca 4 8 Combine Modes 22 ania euiee Chath 4 onad thw eh eee ee awe eeed Coben 4 oe ea che eae ee tm 4 9 CONUNUOUS SCA sassarese aiea aea debegeede needed E ae eee eee da ad aie 4 13 Job Finish Note erein ivawige dee e aerbads ae NENNE ee eae deem ese 4 14 File Name Entty ices nsei E eee Beda ee aed ee EE ea et 4 16 Piot Oveni ocsccceas noe ch REA haa ae ae Pas AEREN any Ree ate AES 4 17 SharpheSS aspici piia gi dard Re did g aa th Dhcde ade deta eB a a etna gdh wide Adwn pA dude ae are 4 18 Backgrnd Density 0 203 s c acha eee E rI EnA
352. ress Login the Right Select key Login Password NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for Login details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 11 36 Management User Job Account gt User Login Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Print Are you sure Total JobAccounting Yes I No 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Account Report and then press the OK key 7 Inthe confirmation screen press Yes the Left Select key A job accounting report is printed 11 37 Management Checking the Counter You can check the number of pages printed and scanned The number is counted by the following items Item Description Printed By Function You can check the number of pages copied Pages faxed and printed and the total number of pages used By Paper You can check the number of pages printed Size for each paper size Scanned Pages You can check the number of pages copied faxed and otherwise scanned and the total number of pages used FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu
353. ress the A or V key to select Off Auto or Manual Press the OK key When Manual is selected Manual appears Press the Aor V key to select 1 Lighter to 5 Darker and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 24 Sending Functions Scanning Image using Application Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable or network cable and install the Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application program For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver see Installing Software on page 2 16 The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver Operate the WIA Drivers in the same manner 1 Connect your computer to the machine using a USB or network cable 2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen 5 3 Use the TWAIN compatible application to scan from your computer NOTE When the login user name and password entry screen appears enter them and click the OK button 4 Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan The scanned data will be sent to your computer 5 25 Sending Functions 5 26 6 Document Box This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box
354. riginals the back side of the last copy will be blank The following binding options are available A Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated B Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Copies can be bound on the top edge facing the same orientation when turning the pages Copies each side of a two sided original onto two individual sheets ttl il The following binding options are available Original Binding Left Right Images on the second sides are not rotated Binding Top Images on the second sides are rotated 180 Two sided to Two sided Produces two sided copies from two sided originals NOTE The paper sizes supported in Two sided to Two sided are Legal Letter Oficio Il Executive A4 B5 A5 and Folio Original 3 12 Basic Operation The procedure for using two sided duplex copying is explained below 1 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Function Menu pata OK Paper Selection O Collate O Duplex O Exit 2 Press the A or V key to select Duplex 3 Press the OK key Duplex appears Duplex pata OK 1 sided gt gt 2 sided 2 sided gt gt 1 sied 4 Press the A or V key to select the desired duplex copying mode If you select 1 sided gt gt 2 sided press Detail the Right
355. rivileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Local User List Management Local User List amp Admin amp Userl Menu Local User List gt m amp DeviceAdmin amp Userl Menu Detail lt OK User Name 1 6 Userl Edit Local User List gt m amp DeviceAdmin amp User1 Menu Menu lt m Detail Edit Add User 7 Press the OK key Local User List appears The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press the A or V key to select the user whose information you want to change and then press the OK key 2 Inthe same fashion as registering a new user press the lt or gt key to select the desired item press Edit the Right Select key change information and then press the OK key Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary After completing changing the user information press the OK key again 5 The overwrite confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The user information is changed and the screen returns to Local User List Deleting a user 1 Press the A or V key to select the user you want to delete and then press Menu the Right Sele
356. roceed to step 6 4 Press the A or V key to select the Forward Rule Press Select the Right Select key The selected file name is indicated by a checkmark next to it If you need to add the Forward Rule repeat steps 4 to 5 to select them 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send and Forward menu 8 104 Default Setting System Menu Setting the destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded Use the procedure below to set the destination A 1 Inthe Send and Forward menu press the A or V key to Send and Forward 0m select Destination Destination 2 Press the OK key The Destination menu appears Destination bmg OK 01I Confirmation Register Exit Confirming Current Destination 1 Inthe Destination menu press the A or V key to select Destination lt 0 Confirmation Confirmation Register Exit 2 Press the OK key Dest Confirm appears Dest Confirm pata oK MMorgan tttttttt tt I l NOTE Press the OK key to edit delete the current destination Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters Exit 3 Press Exit the Right Select key The basic screen reappears 8 105 Default Setting System Menu Registering Destination Destination bmg OK Confirmation Register 1 In
357. rs Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select LAN Interface 8 136 Default Setting System Menu 6 Press the OK key LAN Interface appears LAN Interface gt oK 10Base Half 10Base Ful 7 Press the A or V key to select the desired LAN interface The available LAN interfaces are as follows Auto 10Base Half 10Base Full 100Base Half 100Base Full 1000Base T 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the GE screen returns to the Network Setting menu TCP IP IPv4 Setup Set up TCP IP to connect to the Windows network Set the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses The default settings are TCP IP Protocol On DHCP On Auto IP On NOTE Prior to the IP address entries obtain permission from the network administrator Use the procedure below to setup the TCP IP IPv4 setting es 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name Wm password with administrator privileges to log in and EEE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Blo
358. rs Auto Priority ol OfE On 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu 8 81 Default Setting System Menu Select Key Set If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key you can quickly set the function when using copy functions You can register one of the following functions to each key e None e Paper Selection e Collate e Duplex e Zoom e Combine e Original Size e Orig Orientation e Original Image Density e EcoPrint e Continuous Scan e File Name Entry e JobFinish Notice e Print Override e Sharpness e Backgrnd Density Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Copy System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Copy menu appears Copy lt m AutoPaperSelect Auto Priority Exit Press the A or V key to select Select Key Set 4 Press the OK key Select Key Set appears Select Key Set m Left Right Exit 8 82 Default Setting System Menu Left gt oK Duplex Combine This function is already registered 5 Press the A or V key to select Left or Right 6 Press the OK key This displays the func
359. s 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit System Menu operation panel Counter c 11 23 Management Sys Menu Count 0m User Property Common Settings Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set lt AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Default Setting V Copy Print Count Counter Limit Exit Copy Print Count gt Total 0 Split 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Job Account Set 5 Press the OK key The Job Account Set menu appears 6 Press the A or V key to select Default Setting 7 Press the OK key The Default Setting menu appears 8 Press the A or V key to select Copy Print Count 9 Press the OK key Copy Print Count appears 10 Press the A or V key to select Total or Split 11 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Default Setting menu 11 24 Management Restrictin
360. s Press the A or V key to select the file format from PDF TIFF XPS or JPEG If Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for the color mode for scanning press Detail the Right Select key and select the image quality If you selected PDF you can specify PDF A settings Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for sending Specify the destination and press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 9 Sending Functions Original Image Select image quality suitable to the type of original The table below shows the quality options Text Photo Text and photos together Photo For photos taken with a camera Text Only text no photos For OCR For documents to be read by OCR Light Text Line Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines This function is only available for black and white mode Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals 1 Press the Send key 2 Place the originals Function Menu Color Selection O gt m 3 Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears lt gt Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Press the A or V key to select Original Image Press the OK key Original Image appears Original Image pata OK Photo Text
361. s Secure Protocol lt m LDAP Security SMTP Security POP3 Security 1 Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select POP3 Security 1 POP3 Security 2 or POP3 Security 3 If you selected POP3 Security 1 follow the procedure below If you selected POP3 Security 2 or POP3 Security 3 set in the same way 8 Press the OK key POP3 Security 1 appears POP3 Security 1 m o Off SSL TLS STARTTIS qe 9 Press the A or V key to select Off SSL TLS or STARTTLS 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu SNMPvVv3 Setting Sets up SNMPv3 The default setting is Off Use the procedure below Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8 151 about the procedures 8 163 Default Setting System Menu Optional Network This selects the settings for the optional network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 NOTE This is only displayed when a network interface kit IB 50 or wireless network interface kit IB 51 is installed as an option Check with your network administrator when selecting the network setting After all network related settings have been done restart the network Refer to Restart Network on page 8 170 This is mandatory to make the settings effective When Command Center RX is used network parameters and security settings can be conveniently changed and checked from your PC For more inform
362. s Smid OK 1 1 6 Press the A or V key to select 3 Unsharpen to 3 Sharpen 7 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 Press the Start key to start sending NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 5 23 Sending Functions Backgrnd Density Removes dark background from originals such as newspapers If the ground color is obtrusive select Auto If Auto does not remove the ground color select Manual and adjust the density of the ground color The setting items are as follows Off Does not adjust the ground color Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original Manual Manually adjust the density in 5 levels When Manual is selected press 1 Lighter to 5 Darker to adjust the background density The procedure for adjusting the background density of copies is explained below 1 2 3 Function Menu Sma OK 0I Color Selection O Original Size O Original Image O Exit 4 Backgrnd Density gt lol Offt Auto Manual 6 7 Manual Kad OK 3 4 5 5 Darker 8 Press the Send key Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen Press the Function Menu key Function Menu appears Press the A or V key to select Backgrnd Density Press the OK key Backgrnd Density appears P
363. s reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NO
364. s supported by the machine Measurements in the table take into account a 0 7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width Corner angles must be 90 0 2 Cassette or Multi Multi Purpose Tray Purpose Tray B6 128 x 182 mm Letter 8 5 x 11 ISO B5 176 x 250 mm Legal 8 5 x 14 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 Statement 5 5 x 8 5 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Executive 7 25 x 10 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 3 5 8 x 6 1 2 Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 Envelope Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 A4 210 x 297 mm Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm A5 148 x 210 mm Envelope C5 162 x 229mm A6 105 x 148 mm Hagaki 100 x 148mm B5 182 x 257 mm Oufuku Hagaki 148 x 200 mm Folio 210 x 330 mm Youkei 4 105 x 235 mm 16K 197 x 273 mm Youkei 2 114 x 162 mm Size Entry 70 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm z Except for the optional cassettes Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth but it must be uncoated With paper that is too smooth and slippery several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once causing jams Appendix 12 Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area In the United States basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 500 sheets of paper cut to the standard size or trade size f
365. seconds or less Duplexing Standard Paper supply capability 100 recycled paper may be used NOTE Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types EN ISO 7779 Der h chste Schalldruckpegel betr gt 70 dB A oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779 EK1 ITB 2000 Das Ger t ist nicht fur die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen Um st rende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden Appendix 22 Glossary Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data This is the auto form feed timeout When the preset timeout passes the machine automatically put paper out However no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Bonjour Bonjour also known as zero configuration networking is a service that automatically detects computers devices and services on an IP network Bonjour because an industry standard IP protocol is used allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353 If a firewall is enabled the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bon
366. ser to access all pages including Document Box Address Book and Settings on the navigation menu The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below Login User Name Login Password Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished case sensitive Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows Adminis General Setting Description trator User Device Information The machine s structure can be checked Configuration Counter About Command Center RX Job Status Displays all device information including print and scan jobs storing jobs scheduled jobs and job log history Printing Jobs Status Printing Job Log Sending Job Status Scheduled Jobs Sending Job Log Storing Job Status Storing Job Log Document Box Add or delete document boxes or delete documents within a document box f Sub Address Box Polling Box Job Box Settings Address Book Create edit or delete addresses and address groups Machine Address Book External Address Book Settings One Touch Key Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine Paper Feed Output Original Settings Energy Saver Timer Date Time System Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings Common Job Defaults Copy Printer E mail Scan to Folder FAX Send and For
367. size If Auto is selected the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen for copying Press the Start key to start copying NOTE Press the Reset key to reset the settings selected in Function Menu 4 3 Copying Functions Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray Change the paper size and media type The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below Category Paper Standard Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il Size Sizes A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16K Other ISO B5 Envelope 10 Envelope 9 Envelope 6 Envelope Monarch Envelope DL Envelope C5 Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 4 Youkei 2 and Custom Size Inch models Entry Horizontal 5 83 to 14 02 in 0 01 increments Vertical 2 76 to 8 50 in 0 01 increments Metric models Vertical 70 to 216 mm in 1 mm increments Horizontal 148 to 356 mm in 1 mm increments Media Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Type Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size Custom refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8 10 The input units can be changed in the System menu Refer to Switching Unit of Measure
368. ss the OK key The Report menu appears Report lt gt m Admin Rpt Set Result Rpt Set Exit Press the A or V key to select Result Rpt Set 4 Press the OK key The Result Rpt Set menu appears Result Rpt Set gt 0m FAX RX Result JobFinish Notice Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Send Result The Send Send Result 0m Result menu appears 01 E mail Folder FAX CancelBeforeSend Exit A 6 Press the A or V key to select E mail Folder FAX E mail Folder gt 0m CancelBeforeSend or Dest Info Selected menu off appears On NOTE Selecting CancelBeforeSend can be specified whether the machine prints the report when canceling the operation before sending When selecting Off in both E mail Folder and FAX menu CancelBeforeSend is not displayed 7 Press the A or V key to select Off On or Error Only When selecting CancelBeforeSend press the A or V key to select Off or On If you selected Dest Info select Dest or Name or Dest and Name 8 Press the OK key A Result Report is sent Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Send Result menu 8 115 Default Setting System Menu Adjustment Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance e Copy Denst Adj 8 116 e Send Box Density 8 117 e Backgrnd Density 8 117 e Print
369. ssage displays the location of the jam Paper Jam Location Reference Page Document processor Inside the machine MP Tray Cassettes Duplexer Rear cover Precautions with Paper Jams If a paper jam occurs a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop e Do not reuse jammed papers Ifthe paper tears during removal be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again CAUTION The fixing unit is extremely hot Take sufficient care when working in this area as there is a danger of getting burned Online Help Messages When Paper Jam is displayed press Help the Left Select key to display the procedure to clear the jam Press V to display the next step or press A to display the previous step Press the OK key to exit the online help message display 10 13 Troubleshooting MP Tray Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray 1 Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray 2 Openand close the top cover and front cover to clear the error Cassette Paper Feeder Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette or paper feeder 1 Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder 2 Remove any partially fed paper NOTE Check to see if paper is loaded correctly If no
370. stem Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Optional Network Press the OK key The Optional Network screen appears 5 Press the A or V key to select Basic 6 Press the OK key The Basic menu screen appears Press the A or V key to select TCP IP Settings Press the OK key The TCP IP Settings menu screen appears 8 165 Default Setting System Menu TCP IP This specified whether TCP IP is used The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to TCP IP IPv4 Setup on page 8 137 IPv4 Setting This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv4 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to TCP IP IPv4 Setup on page 8 137 IPv6 Setting This selects the settings for TCP IP IPv6 The method for setting is the same as for the standard Network settings For details refer to TCP IP IPv6 Setup on page 8 146 Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour The default setting is Off Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Ex
371. t reload the paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely The printer warms up and resumes printing 10 14 Troubleshooting Duplexer Paper is jammed in the duplexer Remove the jammed paper using the procedure given below AYA TA A amp AN e ATA OUIAN A s IVA TA A Inside the Machine 1 Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine 2 Open the duplexer s cover in front of the machine and remove any jammed paper Open the duplexer s cover at the rear of the machine and remove any jammed paper 3 Push the cassette back in securely and open and close the front cover to clear the error The machine warms up and resumes printing 1 Pull the paper cassette all the way out of the machine Remove any partially fed paper 2 Open the front cover and lift the developer unit together with the toner container out of the machine 10 15 Troubleshooting 3 Remove the drum unit from the machine by holding the green levers with both hands CAUTION The fuser unit inside the machine is hot Do not touch it as it may result in burn injury NOTE The drum is sensitive to light Never expose the drum unit to light for more than five minutes 4 Ifthe jammed paper appears to be pinched by rollers pull it along the normal running direction of the paper 5
372. t Mm 01I Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Orig lmage Send 6 Press the OK key Orig Image Send appears Orig Image Send Photo Text 7 Press the A or V key to select Text Photo Photo Text for OCR or Light Text Line 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the gi screen returns to the Function Default menu Zoom Select the enlarged reduced default when paper size sending size changed after the originals set The available default settings are shown below Item Description 100 Copy send save at actual size 100 Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size sending size Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 49 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m 01I Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Zoom 6
373. tallation CADEA When Your software is ready to use appears you ee can use the software To print a test page click the 2 Print a test page checkbox and select the machine Ga Sone i Click Finish to exit the wizard Kyocera TWAIN Driver FONTS Installed Installed Print a test page p Enable event notification a i Show Quick Print tab Einish J NOTE When you have selected Device settings in Windows XP the dialog box for device setting will appear after Finish is clicked Configure the settings for options installed on the machine Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed For details refer to the Device Settings in the Printer Driver User Guide on the DVD Ifa system restart message appears restart the computer by following the screen prompts This completes the printer driver installation procedure The TWAIN driver can be installed if the machine and computer are connected via a network If you are installing the TWAIN driver continue by configuring the Setting TWAIN Driver on 2 26 2 21 Preparation before Use Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh The machine s printer functionality can be used by a Macintosh computer NOTE e Installation on MAC OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges e When printing from a Macintosh computer set the machine s emulation to KPDL or KPDL Auto For det
374. te or deactivate restriction Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 25 Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary After completing changing the account information press the OK key again A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The account information is changed Registered is displayed and the screen returns to Account List 11 22 Management Deleting an account 1 Press the A or V key to select the account you want to Account List gt 0 delete and then press Menu the Right Select key SUI R amp D DEP RD Center Menu 2 Press the A or V key to select Delete Menu 0m Detail Edit Add Account 3 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Delete Are you sure UI R amp D DEPT Yes I No 4 Press Yes the Left Select key The account is deleted Completed is displayed and the screen returns to Account List Managing the Copier Printer Counts You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 25 Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11 32 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11 36 for details Use the procedure below to set the counting method
375. ted Appendix 7 Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively To enter a character associated with the same key after another use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character there spaces are automatically entered in between Entering Symbols z Press Text the Right Select key or on the numeric Symbols gt 0 keys to display the Symbols screen Use cursor keys to 21 H9 e Oat ayei select the symbol you want to enter and then press the gt O O I E fa t OK key Text Entry When Select Character Is Selected in Login Operation Settings In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled the character entry method may vary depending on the settings Refer to Login Operation on page 8 73 If a character palette appears on the screen use cursor Login User Name keys to select the desired character from the displayed Morgani characters and then press the OK key to enter it Babcdefghijkimnopqrst uvwxy ZABCDEFGHIJKLMNO NOTE Numerals can be entered directly by pressing Next J numeric keys Appendix 8 Paper This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source Cassette Supported types Plain Preprin
376. ted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Optional paper feeder Supported types Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Multi Purpose tray MP tray Supported types Plain Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Rough Vellum Letterhead Color Colour High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Supported paper sizes A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 16K 216 x 340mm Custom 105 x 148 to 216 x 356mm 4 1 8 x 5 13 16 to 8 1 2 x 14 inches Supported paper sizes A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter Oficio Il Executive 16K 216 x 340mm Custom 148 x 210 to 216 x 356mm 5 13 16 x 8 5 16 to 8 1 2 x 14 inches Supported paper sizes Letter Legal Statement Executive Oficio Il A4 A5 A6 B5 B6 Folio 216 x 340mm 16k Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm No of sheets 250 80g m No of sheets 250 80g m No of sheets 50 80g m Thick paper A4 JIS B5 A5 Folio Legal Letter 1 Oficio Il Statement Executive A6 B6 ISO B5 16K Other sizes Portrait 2 76 to 8 50 or 70 to 216 mm Landscape 5 83 to 14 02 or 148 to 356 mm Postcards Postcards 100 x 148 mm 15 Oufuku Hagaki return postcard Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Appendix 9
377. ted is displayed and the registration of the destination is deleted Press the OK key The Address Book list screen appears Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to newly register NOTE If you want to search from the Address Book refer to Search in Address Book on page 3 26 1 Select Key No m No 12 Exit 2 F 3 Key Edit lt 0 ol Edit Detail Delete Exit 4 5 Addressbook gt 0m amp Fiala amp Maury Menu 6 7 Overwrite Are you sure No 1 Yes l f No 8 Press the OK key A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Select key The selected destination is registered to the one touch key overwriting the previous one Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 134 Default Setting System Menu Restarting the System Restart the printer without turning the power switch off Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine Same as the computer restart Use the procedure below to restart the system 7 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count lt select System Network and press the OK key Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name W password with administrator privileges to log in and yh ati dt press Login the Right Select key Login Password
378. ter 5 Press the A or V key to select Use Numeric Key or Select Character 6 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Common Settings menu 8 73 Default Setting System Menu RAM Disk Mode A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu Common Settings lt m appears Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select RAM Disk Mode 4 Press the OK key RAM Disk Mode appears RAM Disk Mode Sig OK On 5 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 6 If On is selected and the OK key is pressed the RAM RAM Disk Size O disk size screen appears 1 32 EEA If Off is selected and the OK key is pressed proceed to step 8 7 Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the size of the RAM disk 8 A confirmation screen appears Press Yes the Left Restart Select key The machine is restarted Are you sure Yes I No 8 74 Default Setting System Menu Optional Memory When the memory option is
379. the operation enter the Account ID Managing Accounts This section explains how to add a new account The following entries are required Item Description Account Name Enter the account name up to 32 characters Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 Restriction This Prohibits printing scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11 25 Use the procedure below to register a new account NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel System Menu Counter 2 Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Pressthe A or V key to select User Job Account 4 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and E E E press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 11 19 Management User Job Account gt M User Login Set Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set AccountingAccess Account Report L Exit Account List lt gt m amp e amp GUI Design eRD Center Menu Menu oK Detail Edit Delete
380. the sending computer Max No of Characters 64 chars Path Share name For example scannerdata If saving in a folder in the shared folder share name folder name in shared folder 128 chars Login User Name User name for folder access For example abcdnet james smith 64 chars Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars j If you specify a port number other than the default 445 use the Host name port number format E g SMBhostname 140 8 124 Default Setting System Menu Folder FTP Address The table below explains the items to be entered Description Max No of Characters Host Name Host name or IP address of the 64 chars sending computer Path Path for the file to be stored 128 chars For example User ScanData If no path is entered the file is stored in the home directory Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars For example abcdnet james smith Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars If you specify a port number other than the default 21 use the Hostname port number format E g FTPhostname 140 1 Press the lt or gt key to display Folder SMB or GE Detail lt O Folder FTP Folder SMB 4 6 Ntid7004 Edit 2 Press Edit the Right Select key An entry screen Host Name SMB appears RD Centeri Enter the host name Text
381. the Destination menu press the A or V key to select Register 2 Press the OK key Register appears To select a destination from the address book press the A or V key to select Address Book and then press the OK key This displays the address book Select your desired destination NOTE For selecting a destination from the address book refer to Specifying Destination on page 3 25 Exit Register Sma OK 01 Address Book Address Entry Completed Register Sma OK Address Book 0JxAddress Entr To directly enter a destination press the A or V key to select Address Entry and then press the OK key This displays an entry screen Enter the destination address directly 3 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Destination menu NOTE If the address of the selected destination has been changed after you selected the destination from the address book is displayed before Address Entry Refer to Confirming Current Destination on page 8 105 and reconfirm the destination address 8 106 Default Setting System Menu Document Box Settings The following settings are available for Document Box e Job Box 8 107 e Select Key Set 8 109 Job Box Job Box settings can be set Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion Quick Copy Jobs sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy Job Ret Deletion sets th
382. ther or not to communicate using RAW Port Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol Select whether or not to use IPP and the number of the port to be used Off Port number 631 IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL SSL must be set to On in SSL Setting on page 8 155 On Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS SSL must be set to On in SSL Setting on page 8 155 8 151 Default Setting System Menu LDAP Select whether or not to use Off LDAP The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed x The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed Use the procedure below 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and TENE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting lt 01 T
383. tion selection screen for the flexible key selected in step 5 The screen shown is the one when Left is selected 7 Press the A or V key to select the function you want to register to the flexible key 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Copy menu IMPORTANT If you try to set the function that is registered to the other flexible key you cannot set it and This function is already registered is displayed 8 83 Default Setting System Menu Printer Settings Printing from computers settings are generally made on the application software screen However the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine e Emulation Set 8 84 EcoPrint 8 87 e Override A4 LTR 8 88 e Duplex 8 89 e Copies 8 90 e Orientation 8 91 FormFeed Timeout 8 92 e LF Action 8 92 e CR Action 8 93 e Job Name 8 94 e User Name 8 95 e MP Tray Priority 8 96 e Paper Feed Mode 8 97 e Auto Cass Change 8 98 e Resolution 8 99 NOTE If user login administration is enabled you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges Emulation Set Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers Selection of emulation This machine can emulate the following printers Line Printer IBM Proprinter e EPSON LQ 850 e PCL6 e KPDL e KPDL
384. tomatically recognized and connected If an IP connection is used the settings below are required e05 6 Click Print amp Fax IDETTE CD Personal E3 i mo a Appearance Po Dock Espais a Language amp Security Spotlight Hardware 3 i m amp CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard Mouse Print amp Fax Sound Saver Internet amp Wireless A 8 m MobileMe Network Bluetooth Sharing System u GQ O aO Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access Jels A 7 Click the plus symbol to add the installed printer bald CD driver sea sesa Open Print Queue E e idie Pen nd n Options amp Supplies bai oiie Location Kind Ss e om Status Idle C Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences O Default printer Last Printer Used B Default paper size A4 rH Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 23 Preparation before Use Protocol Line PrinterDaemon LPD Queue Name N Location Print Using 008 ae i S Default Fax IP Windows Search Installable Options Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it C
385. u There are two sleep modes with different levels of sleep Quick Recovery and Energy Saver Quick Recovery Mode The recovery from the sleep mode is faster than when using Energy Saver mode Energy Saver Mode Recovery mode This makes it possible to reduce energy consumption even further than with Quick With Energy Saver mode you can set whether to enable the Energy Saver mode for each separate function NOTE For information on the Quick Recovery mode and Energy Saver mode refer to Energy Saver Function on page 2 7 Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings Default Screen Sound Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Timer Setting and press the OK key 8 37 Default Setting System Menu Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J Timer Setting lt m PanelReset Timer Low Power Timer Exit Energy Saver gt Card Reader FAX Exit Sleep Level Sma OK fol Quick Recovery Energy Saver Exit Network Sma OK Oi OfF On 10 11 A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right
386. u 15 Press the A or V key to select Auto IP IPv4 Setting paid OK DHCP IP Address Exit 16 Press the OK key Auto IP appears Gq Auto IP Said OK Off 17 Press the A or V key to select Off and then press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 18 Press the A or V key to select IP Address IPv4 Setting pata OK DHCP Auto IP IP Address Exit 19 Press the OK key IP Address appears IP Address Sig OK WW 000 000 000 8 139 Default Setting System Menu IP Address OK 123 145 167 189 IPv4 Setting pata OK IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gat eway Exit Subnet Mask M 000 000 000 om 20 Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address Press the lt or gt key to move the cursor position horizontally Press the A or V key or the numeric keys to enter the IP Address Each 3 digits can be set between 000 and 255 IMPORTANT When the DHCP Setting page 8 142 is On the current IP address is displayed and cannot be changed When setting an IP address set the DHCP Setting page 8 142 to Off 21 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu 22 Press the A or V key to select Subnet Mask 23 Press the OK key Subnet Mask appears 24 Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask Press the lt or gt key to
387. uge on the left side of the front of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining paper supply When paper is exhausted the pointer will go down to the level of empty NOTE If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag 7 Select the media type plain recycled etc loaded in the cassette Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2 54 2 49 Preparation before Use Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement R 216 x 340 mm and 16K Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper IMPORTANT When using media types other than plain paper such as recycled or colored paper always specify the media type setting Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2 56 If you are using a paper weight of 106 g m or more set the media type to Thick The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows A4 or smaller plain paper 80 g m recycled paper or color paper 50 sheets e Hagaki 15 sheet e OHP film 1 sheet Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Monarch Youkei 4 Youkei 2 1 sheet NOTE When y
388. und t Screen Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears 3 Press the A or V key to select Function Default 8 53 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default Mm 01I Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Backgrnd Send 6 Press the OK key Backgrnd Send appears Backgrnd Send pata OK Auto Manual Darker 5 7 Press the A or V key to select Off Auto or Manual Darker 5 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default The table below shows the available settings No EcoPrint performed EcoPrint performed NOTE Refer to page 4 8 for EcoPrint Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings gt m Default Screen Sound Exit 8 54 Default Setting System Menu Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4
389. unt menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0 select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings m 01 Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Press the A or V key to select XPS FitTo Page Press the OK key XPS FitTo Page appears XPS FitTo Page pata OK 02 On 7 Press the A or V key to select Off or On 8 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Function Default menu 8 62 Default Setting System Menu 2 in 1 Layout Select the default value for layout when 2 in 1 is selected for Combine Items available for the default value are as follows o e OS Ea Lto R H TtoB Arranges from left to right or top to bottom El R toL Arranges from right to left Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account Exit Common Settings m Default Screen Sound Exit Function Default m Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit Detail Setting Kma oK 4 in 1 Layout
390. used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings SSL Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL The default setting is On Use the procedure below to make the setting 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count select System Network and press the OK key Report Counter System Network Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name password with administrator privileges to log in and BEES press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login J 2 The System Network menu appears System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit 3 Press the A or V key to select Network Setting 8 155 Default Setting System Menu 4 Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears Network Setting Host Name LAN Interface Exit oi Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appears Secure Protocol lt m fol SSL IPP Security HTTP Security Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select SSL 8 Press the OK key SSL appears SSL gt 0 02 On 9 Press the A or V key to select On or Off 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu IPP Security Specify the protocol to be used for
391. ust be set to On in Protocol Detail on page 8 151 The table below shows the available settings Item Description Off Do not use security employed by the POP3 server SSL TLS Encryption is applied any data communication To enable POP3 security the POP3 port may have to be changed according to the server settings Typically 995 for SSL TLS is well known POP3 port STARTTLS Encryption is applied any data communication Typically 110 for STARTTLS is well known POP3 port You can change the port number using Command Center RX Use the procedure below to make the setting Sys Menu Count Report Counter Exit Login User Name 0 Login Password Login J System Network lt I F Block Set Security Level Exit Network Setting lt Host Name LAN Interface Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select System Network and press the OK key A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key 2 The System Network menu appears Press the A or V key to select Network Setting Press the OK key The Network Setting menu appears 8 162 Default Setting System Menu 5 Press the A or V key to select Secure Protocol 6 Press the OK key Secure Protocol appear
392. uthentication Kit B Operation Guide Appendix 4 Character Entry Method In character entry screens use the procedure below to enter characters Keys Used Use the following keys to enter characters 1 2 6 G 3 Stop Function Menu 0 1 GHI 7 3 4 1 OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character s 2 Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position If the cursor is at the end of the line the character to the left of it is deleted 3 Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen 4 Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position or select a character from the character list a 5 Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter 6 Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen 7 Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter When Text is displayed Appendix 5 Selecting Type of Characters To enter characters the following three types are available ABC To enter alphabets 123 To enter numerals Symbols To enter symbols rT In a character entry screen press Text the Right File name input Select key to select the type of characters you want to Report j enter 123 Current character type T Each time you press Text the Right Select key the oe
393. utions Inc 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 81 6 6764 3555 http www kyoceradocumentsolutions com cy KYOCERA Document Solutions
394. va darn a le le ee Palace la ele Index 1 Quick Guide Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information before using this machine Administrator tasks To make copies To print Simply press the Start key tomake ax You can print via a network and copies You can also fine tune the over the USB connection or print a tcopies copy settings by changing the tprints PDF file directly from USB paper size adjusting the density EA memory etc Print over the USB Copying with Printing Documents Print specific Stored in Removable via a settings USB Memory network connection Connect the Connecting Cables USB cable Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the printer driver on your computer 2 16 Loading Paper 2 46 Placing Originals on the Platen 2 59 Printing Operation Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing Printing from 4 1 in USB Memory Applications 3 16 6 2 Administrator tasks To send documents You can send scanned images via a network and over the USB connection Or you can also store scanned images in USB memory T It sends Send Send to as Folder E mail SMB Saving Send to Documents to PC USB Memory Connecting Cables Connecting Cables Network Setup LAN Cable Connection Install the scanner driver on your computer 2 16 Create a shared folder on the Plug the USB destination computer 2 38 memory Editing Dest
395. ward Forward Rules 1 Operation Panel Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings General TCP IP Protocol Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings Device Security Send Security Network Security Certificates Management Settings Configure the advanced management settings Job Accounting Authentication ID Card s Notification Report History Settings SNMP Reset 1 The fax function only shows ECOSYS M2530dn ECOSYS M2535dn 2 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings depending on the permissions of the user 3 This is displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is installed 2 29 Preparation before Use NOTE Here information on the FAX settings has been omitted For more information on using the FAX refer to the FAX Operation Guide Accessing Command Center RX 1 Launch your Web browser 2 Inthe address or location bar enter the machine s IP address or the host name Examples https 192 168 48 21 for IP address https MF P001 if the host name is MFP001 r e 10180814 KYOCERA Command Center EX Location Last Updated 2013 08 23 13 36 05 Status A Home English Auto refresh Admin Login User Name m Password amp Printer Ready E Seamer Miray Z FAX Preparing G Device Information gt ge aoii E
396. with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key The User Job Account menu appears 4 Press the A or V key to select Unknown ID Job 5 Press the OK key Unknown ID Job appears Press the A or V key to select Reject or Permit Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the User Job Account menu 11 14 Management Job Accounting Job accounting Manages the copy print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations e Manageability of up to 100 individual accounts e Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits between 0 and 99999999 for security Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID e Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined e Restricting the print counter in one page increments up to 9 999 999 copies e Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined First Job Accounting Setup Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup Enable job accounting page 11 15 v Add an account page 11 19 v Log out page 11 17 v Other users log in for operations page 11 17 Enabling Disabling Job Accounting Enable job accounting Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting 1 Press the
397. x characters Up to 64 characters Path Path for the file to be stored For example User ScanData If no path is entered the file is stored in the home directory Up to 128 characters Login User Name FTP server log in user name Up to 64 characters Login Password FTP server log in password Up to 64 characters i To specify a port number different from the default 21 enter using the format host name port number e g FTPhostname 140 3 23 Basic Operation 13 Press Yes the Left Select key This makes a connection with the entered destination If the connection is successful Connected is displayed on the screen Press OK the Right Select key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen If the connection failed Cannot connect is displayed Press OK the Right Select key The screen shown in step 3 reappears Check and re enter the destination 14 Press the Confirm Destination key to confirm the Dest Confirm V0 registered destinations ERD Center Press Exit the Right Select key to return to the basic screen Exit 15 Press the Start key Transmission starts NOTE If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission page 8 107 is set to On the Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start key is pressed 3 24 Basic Operation Specifying Destinati
398. y Set appears No 12 The screen shown is the one when No 1 No 12 is pressed and held Exit 2 Pressthe A or V key to select the key number to which you want to register the destination 3 Press the OK key The Address Book list screen Addressbook gt 0m appears amp Fiala amp Maury Menu 4 Press the A or V key to select the destination you want to register NOTE If you want to search from the Address Book refer to Search in Address Book on page 3 26 5 Press the OK key The selected destination is registered to the one touch key Registered is displayed and the screen returns to the basic screen 8 133 Default Setting System Menu Editing One touch Key Edit delete the destinations you added to One touch Key Use the procedure below to edit the one touch key In the Send or FAX screen press the one touch key where you want to edit the destination and hold it 2 seconds or longer Select Key Set appears The screen shown is the one when No 1 No 12 is pressed and held Press the A or V key to select the key number where you want to edit the destination Press the OK key The Key Edit appears Press the A or V key to select Edit NOTE If you select Delete here and press the OK key you can delete the registration of the destination If you press Yes the Left Select key in the screen that appears Comple
399. ys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to Sys Menu Count 0m select Common Settings System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Common Settings 0m lol Language Default Screen Sound Exit Press the A or V key to select Function Default 4 Press the OK key The Function Default menu appears Function Default 0m lol Color Selection Scan Resolution FAX Resolution Exit 5 Press the A or V key to select Detail Setting 6 Press the OK key The Detail Setting menu appears Detail Setting pata OK 4 in 1 Layout Border Line Exit 7 Press the A or V key to select Orig Binding 8 Press the OK key Orig Binding appears Orig Binding Sma OK lo WA Left Right 0 HY Top 9 Press the A or V key to select A Left Right or Ee Top 10 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the Detail Setting menu 8 67 Default Setting System Menu Finish Binding Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when 1 sided gt gt 2 sided or 2 sided gt gt 2 sided is selected for Duplex Items available for the default value are as follows o f e OS HH Left Right Left right binding Ha Top Top binding Use the procedure below to select the default value
400. ys the total duration of fax transmissions i FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter System Menu Counter 2 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit Sys Menu Count 0m Login User Name Login Password Login 1 Press the System Menu Counter key on the main unit operation panel 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and password with administrator privileges to log in and press Login the Right Select key NOTE Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix 5 for details on entering characters 3 The User Job Account menu appears 11 32 Management User Job Account gt User Login Set Unknown ID Job Exit Job Account Set AccountingAccess Account Report Exit Total Accounting gt Scanned Pages FAX TX Pages Exit Copy Print Pages Copy 1 3 1234567 Total Accounting gt Printed Pages Scanned Pages Counter Reset Exit Reset counter Are you sure Total JobAccounting Yes I No
401. ystem Menu operation panel Counter Sys Menu Count 0m 2 Press the A or V key to select User Job Account 04 User Job Account User Property Common Settings Exit A login screen will appear Then enter the user ID and Login User Name m password with administrator privileges to log in and SE press Login the Right Select key Login Password Login The User Job Account menu appears Press the A or V key to select User Login Set User Job Account User Login Set 11 Job Account Set Unknown ID Job Exit 7 5 Press the OK key The User Login Set menu appears User Login Set m Local User List Group Auth Exit 6 Press the A or V key to select User Login 7 Press the OK key User Login appears User Login oK o OfFf Local Authentic Netwk Authentic Management Server Type lt gt m NTLM 0J Kerberos Ext Host Name 0 ABC Text 8 Pressthe A or V key to select Local Authentic or Netwk Authentic and then press the OK key Select Off to disable user login administration When Network Authentication is selected select NTLM Kerberos or Ext for the server type and press the OK key If NTLM or Kerberos is selected for the server type enter the host name up to 64 characters and domain name up to 256 characters of
402. ze and media type for manual paper feed Sys Menu Count 0m System Network User Job Account 05 Common Settings Exit Common Se ttings gt m Defaul Sound t Screen Exit Orig Paper Set m lol Custom Orig Size Def Orig Size Custom PaperSize Exit 1 Inthe Sys Menu Count menu press the A or V key to select Common Settings 2 Press the OK key The Common Settings menu appears Press the A or V key to select Orig Paper Set 4 Press the OK key The Orig Paper Set menu appears 5 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Set 8 14 Default Setting System Menu MP Tray Set Sma OK 01 MP Tray Size MP Tray Type Exit MP Tray Size pata OK a5 D a6 MP Tray Set Sma OK MP Tray Size MP Tray Type Exit MP Tray Type pata OK Transparency Rough 6 Press the OK key The MP Tray Set menu appears 7 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Size 8 Press the OK key MP Tray Size appears 9 Press the A or V key to select the paper size 10 Press the OK key The screen returns to the MP Tray Set menu 11 Press the A or V key to select MP Tray Type 12 Press the OK key MP Tray Type appears 13 Press the A or V key to select the paper type 14 Press the OK key Completed is displayed and the screen returns to the MP Tray

KYOCERA ECOSYS M2535dn

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents